JP2022171865A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which allows a player to easily recognize variation of patterns.

SOLUTION: After a left upper pattern, a left lower pattern, a right upper pattern, and a right lower pattern, out of a large pattern group 1331, are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner, the left upper pattern and the right upper pattern forming a ready-to-win mode on a first effective line are oscillated so as to rotate with respect to a vertical axis at a prescribed angle and then are temporarily stopped and report the ready-to-win mode. After reporting the ready-to-win mode, a winning mode forming step is guided while oscillating the patterns so as to rotate with respect to the vertical axis at the prescribed angle. During variable display in which the large pattern group 1331 is temporarily stopped, a small pattern group 1302 is being varied and displayed without temporary stop display of some patterns.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 180

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

The group of symbols is oscillated in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the winning effective line, and the group of symbols during the variable display is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the variable display is further continued from the temporary stop state to just before the end of the variation due to the shaking variation. There is a game machine capable of sustaining the player's sense of anticipation for the game by giving the player a strong sense of anticipation as if to play.

JP-A-2002-153640

However, it was not possible to easily recognize the variation of the pattern.
In one aspect, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which variations in symbols can be easily recognized.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine is provided as described below. The gaming machine includes display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays symbols, and control means for causing the display means to display the variable display game, and includes first and second symbols as symbols. As the temporary stop display of the first symbol, the control means performs the temporary stop display at the first trigger in the variable display game, performs the temporary stop display at the second trigger after the first trigger, and performs the second trigger. A temporary stop display is performed at a later third timing, and when the first symbol performs a temporary stop display, the second symbol does not perform a temporary stop display.

According to one aspect, it is possible to easily recognize the variation of the symbols in the gaming machine.

It is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system for a gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the batch display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of checksum calculation processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of initial value random number update processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the input process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the switch read-in process of 1st Embodiment. 4 is a diagram showing a flowchart of output processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a prize-winning switch / state monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the dishonesty & prize-winning monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prize-winning number counter update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure game process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a special figure starting entrance switch common process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a special figure usual process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure usual process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation|variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop design setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop design setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the variation pattern setting process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a change start information setting process according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of process transition setting processing (special figure 1) during a special figure fluctuation|variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of process transition setting processing (special figure 2) during special figure fluctuation|variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process during special figure fluctuation|variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during a special figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of a process during a special figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of a process during a special figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the frequency|count update process of high probability fluctuation|variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation mode information check process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 in small hit fanfare of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fanfare/during interval processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during opening of a big winning a prize opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during opening of a big prize-winning opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize hole remaining ball process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize hole residual ball process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 2 according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure usual process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during the small-hit fanfare of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of process transition setting processing during a small hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process during a small hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit operation|movement transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the small hit operation|movement of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small-hit residual ball process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small-hit residual ball process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit end process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit completion|finish process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special-figure usual process transition setting process 3 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation command setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the design variation control process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the blink control timer initial value table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the distribution process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of 2-byte allocation processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of normal figure game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the general electric prize-winning switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of normal figure normal processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process during normal figure fluctuation|variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during the normal figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process during the normal figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of process transition setting processing in per normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during normal per figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of normal electric operation transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a normal electric operation timing chart of the normal variable winning device of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal electric residual ball process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end process transition setting process per normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of end processing per normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of segment LED editing processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of magnet fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the board electric wave unauthorized monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. 9 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main prize ball signal edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening signal edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the receiving command analysis process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration control process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of the second embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the special variable winning device of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the game machine of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (part 1) of the screen which the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example (1) of the production|presentation flow of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (2) of the production|presentation flow of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (2) of the screen which the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment displays. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (part 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (No. 5) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example (part 6) of the screen which the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the unit of an accumulation display, and a round of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the execution timing of special round progress production|presentation of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart of clearing processing of a cumulative round counter according to the second embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example (3) of the production|presentation flow of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (part 7) of the screen which the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment displays. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (No. 8) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the screen which the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the character and production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing timings at which character selection can be accepted according to the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the screen which the display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment displays. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing timings at which character selection can be accepted according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of a losing effect setting process according to modification 2 of the third embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of a losing effect setting process according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of character selection effect setting processing according to modification 4 of the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 4 of the third embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram (Part 2) showing an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 4 of the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 4 of the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 4 of the third embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of character selection effect setting processing according to modification 5 of the third embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of character selection effect setting processing according to modification 6 of the third embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of character selection effect setting processing according to Modification 7 of the third embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of options corresponding to the character being selected in Modification 7 of the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the performance for every hit of 4th Embodiment. It is a timing table showing an example of game progress of winning A of the fourth embodiment. It is a timing table showing an example of game progress of winning B of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot system command list table of 4th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the large winning opening opening mode in 1R and 2R of winning A and the opening mode of big winning opening in 1R of winning B in the fourth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the reception timing of the n-th command to open the big winning opening and the display timing of the round correspondence display in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (part 1) of the screen which the display apparatus of 4th Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example (part 2) of the screen which the display apparatus of 4th Embodiment displays. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence of the round correspondence display of 4th Embodiment, and a round. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence of the number of rounds of 4th Embodiment, and the number of unit conversion rounds. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example (part 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example (No. 5) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a list of model-specification-related commands according to Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the number of prize balls and the number of unit conversion prize balls in Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen which the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence of the number of prize balls and the number of accumulation points of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance table|surface for every hit including the presence or absence of the V information game of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game flow of the probability variation alert|reporting for every hit of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game flow of the V information game of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of progress of the V alerting|reporting game in hit B of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example (No. 6) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example (No. 7) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example (No. 8) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of progress of the V alerting|reporting game in hit X of the modification 2 of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 2 of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 2 of the fourth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative design of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode during fluctuation|variation in the decorative design A of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the switching timing of the decoration design display mode in the special figure game variation of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative design of the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a display device of modification 2 of the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of a large pattern in the display apparatus of the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display mode list according to the state of a large pattern in the display apparatus of the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 2 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 2 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 2 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (part 4) of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 2 of the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display mode of a large pattern in the display apparatus of the modification 3 of 5th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

A game machine (pachinko machine) 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame (transparent plate (transparent member) holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12 .

Also, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs, etc. A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing) in red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by output sound (voice) from the speakers 19a and 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown) and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation section 24 for a ball shooting device are provided. Further, an option setting section 25 is provided at the upper edge of the upper tray 21 for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting section 25, and an enter button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting section 25. As shown in FIG. Note that the option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit for the player to set the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 creates an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. can be done. For example, an effect in which a player's operation is intervened is an effect in a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character displayed on 41 can be operated, or the identification information in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Also, on the right side of the option setting section 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a ball lending button 27 operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation portion 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. (see Figure 2). By operating the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, the player can set the volume emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the game board 30, for example. .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 . That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. Also, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed based on the progress of the game.

Further, the left and right parts of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating. This board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

In the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal figure starting gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal figure start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) that provides conditions for starting the special figure variation display game. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, immediately below the starting winning opening 36, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a condition for starting the special figure fluctuation display game.
The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which the upper end side is turned in a direction in which it falls down to the front side to open and allow game balls to easily flow in. This movable member 37b is always It maintains a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which game balls cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device opens the game ball to easily flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the normal variable prize winning device 37, an out port 30a for recovering game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port is provided.
Furthermore, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game A prize winning device (large prize winning opening) 38 is provided.

The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type open/close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. The closed state (state disadvantageous to the player) in which the big winning port is closed is changed to an open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open/close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, During the state, the closed state of the large winning opening is changed to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, and providing a predetermined game value (prize balls) to the player. It's becoming The game balls winning these special variable winning devices 38 are detected by the big winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the game area 32 in which game balls flow down, the area to the left of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that Then, the player can aim to win a prize in the starting prize-winning opening 36 by adjusting the shooting force and shooting a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed hitting), and shooting a game ball to the right-side game area (so-called By hitting to the right, it is possible to aim for winning the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area. A game ball that is shot is configured to pass through the channel formed by the channel forming member 42 . At least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized from the front of the flow path forming member 42 through the flow path forming member 42. .

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that constitute the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34 A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a general pattern variation display game triggered by winning a prize and for displaying various types of information.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, a special figure 1 design display unit 53, a special figure 2 design display unit 54, and a general design design display unit. 55 , a normal map reservation display section 56 and a state display section 57 .

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be explained using FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the gaming machine control system of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 , which is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111 . a CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130 It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like that generates a clock. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400. and enabled.

The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current)-DC converter that generates the DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from the DC32V voltage. a normal power supply unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage during a power failure to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the gaming microcomputer 111, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure to the game control device 100 and a control signal generation unit 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a power failure monitor signal and a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of a power failure.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , may be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are provided on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. Control signal generating section 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by normal power supply section 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control, and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable) may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which a display result that is derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed in a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called all-rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of "no reach" < "normal reach" < "special 1 reach" < "special 2 reach" < "special 3 reach" < "premier reach". Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. Control the whole. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. A clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds (ms)) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit. I have.

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small win) or loss) and the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (time-saving operating state), the number of starting memories, etc., from among a plurality of variation pattern tables, select one variation pattern table. to get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine 10, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, and a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37. , the gate switch 34a in the normal start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the big winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, when detecting the detection signal of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a and the abnormality of the sensor or switch is input to the second input port 123 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, or the glass frame open detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 or the like. A detection signal from the switch 63 and a detection signal from a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 asserts an enable signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the game microcomputer 111 (changes to a valid level). can be read by doing The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal based on the signal) and supplying it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from the signal. A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus. is configured to Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122 , 123 and 124 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. It should be noted that detection signals of switches that do not need to be processed, such as starting switches, output from the proximity I/F 121 are supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, when the game machine is used as a game signal. An error signal indicating the uncontrollable state is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch not via the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by this chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus. there is

Also, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and the large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 and the general electric solenoid 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 are connected. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open/close data. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, and provides information on the game machine 10. can be supplied to an external device. In addition, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. , a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the lead-in side digit line, and a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal board 71 an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via a digit line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. In addition, since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same way as a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control device of the first embodiment.
The performance control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 made up of an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 , and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 . A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for this purpose, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a PROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be retained even if power is not supplied during a power failure. A FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, and other processing.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also stores an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video RAM) that is used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 . ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling: small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address bus/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier or the like for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The resulting voice is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address bus/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a driving source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and a production accessory switch 47 for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. (Production motor switch) function to detect the on / off state and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and detect the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 for the main control microcomputer A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, it is supplied to the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 and amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc. and put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game starting gate 34, the random number for determining the hit of the normal game is extracted and stored in the ROM 111B. is compared with the judgment value stored in , and the process of judging the hit/loss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display unit 55, processing is performed to display the normal pattern variation display game that is stopped and displayed. When the result of this normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display unit 55 displays a special result mode corresponding to each of the first to third hit stop symbols, and the general electric solenoid 37c. to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display unit 55 is controlled to display the result of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display game A random number value for judging a big hit is extracted and compared with the judging value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process for judging a hit or miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, a starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, the second special figure variable display game is used for judging the big hit. The random value is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of judging the hit or miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (production control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time in the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54, processing for displaying the special figure variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). .

Also, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs processing for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode or the small win result mode in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. is displayed, and processing for generating a special game state or a small winning game state (that is, processing for executing a special game or a small winning game) is performed. In the process of generating the special game state and the small winning game state, the CPU 111A, for example, causes the large winning opening solenoid 38b to open the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, thereby allowing game balls to flow into the big winning opening. and control. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the big winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved. is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeate) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, general-purpose high-probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state). is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is increased more than when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal pattern probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric opening time) and the number of openings (for example, 500 msec × 1 time) of the first winning stop pattern, The opening time of the second per stop pattern (general electric open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the opening time of the third per stop design (electrical open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 m seconds × 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern stop time, the number of times the normal pattern is opened, and the normal pattern open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (ordinary figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (eg 10000 ms is 1000 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric open time) is set to the normal state (normal low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (eg 100 ms to 1352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of openings of the normal electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, two times) for one winning result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set a second opening number of times (eg, four times). In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the case of the normal operation state. It can be a probability (universal high probability state, eg, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern opening number of times, the normal pattern opening time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Moreover, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

Next, the configuration of the collective display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a batch display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 has 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The collective display device 50 displays various states by lighting modes of LED_00 to LED_31.

Collective display device 50, by allocating various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31, round display unit 51, special figure 1 pending display unit 52, special figure 1 design display unit 53, and special figure 2 design display unit 54 , a general pattern display portion 55 , a general pattern reservation display portion 56 and a state display portion 57 . The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game by the lighting modes of four LEDs, LED_00 to LED_03. The special figure 1 pending display unit 52 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 design display unit 53 displays the design in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 design display unit 54 displays the design in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_14 to LED_21. The general pattern display unit 55 displays the patterns in the general pattern game by lighting modes of four LEDs, LED_24 to LED_27. The normal map reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reservations in the normal game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_28 and LED_29. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game by the lighting modes of the two LEDs, LED_30 and LED_31. The special figure 2 pending display unit 58 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_22 and LED_23.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. The main processing is processing executed by the CPU 111A.

Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, the first address of the area where the values of registers, etc. are saved is set. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the range of addresses of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order. In step S4, 00h at the top of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, and the shooting of game balls is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) for performing various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means A waiting time (eg, 3 seconds) is set to wait for the program to start successfully. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is clocked using a storage area (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, etc.) that is not subject to validity determination (checksum calculation) of data held in the RAM area. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated. can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch may be changed from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power will be detected. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

Next, after performing a process (step S7) of setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds), a process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). do First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read through the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) is set (step S8) to check whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. A determination is made (step S9).

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits until the game machine 10 is powered off. . In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are still retained. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by "-1" (step S11), and the value of the timer changes to "0". '' (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired, access to RWM (Read Write Memory) such as RAM 111C or EEPROM is permitted (step S12; Y). S13), output OFF data to all output ports (set to no output state) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in the first embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15), Based on the state of the first input port 122 read earlier, it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on (step S16).

If the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17), if normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), checksum calculation processing is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (step S19). match or not (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 (FIG. 7), and the process for the normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

Further, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N ), and if it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. make a means of

In step S21 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are the blackout inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. After that, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is checked to determine whether or not the special figure is in the high probability state (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), skip steps S23 and S24 and proceed to step S25. In addition, when the special figure is in the high probability (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, the high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the collective display device 50 device) is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. proceed to In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, screen specification command (customer waiting demo screen command if customer waiting, Otherwise, a plurality of commands such as the command for the recovery screen are sent. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information about the number of presentations and high-probability number information is transmitted.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are cleared. The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production|presentation control board (production|presentation control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it transfers to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 reservation number command, a special figure 2 reservation number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (displaying a customer waiting demo screen, a predetermined A plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a period of time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information about the number of presentations and high-probability number information is transmitted.

In step S31, processing for activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms) to the CPU 111A and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step S31, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is the method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the winning pattern of the special figure is determined RWM as the initial value (start value) (step S33), interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on. ), it is possible to destroy the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and destroy the regularity of the random numbers. Although it is not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit are used for the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit pattern random numbers. configured to generate However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, winning random number, and winning pattern random number are determined by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is the unit of processing. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and hit pattern random number, each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value each time the random number is cycled. ” is adopted. Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with "+1" or "-1", or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, 2 times) to be checked is set (step S36). It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting by the initial value random number update processing.

As for the initial value random number update processing in step S35, there is a method of performing the initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing as well as in the main processing. In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of once prohibiting interruption (step S39) is performed. A process of outputting OFF data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing checksum calculation processing (step S43) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44), access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), the system waits for the gaming machine to be powered off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-insertion.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the main control means etc.), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means at power-on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (game control Device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation section (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and an initialization operation section. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.
[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of checksum calculation processing according to the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of the RAM being used. Next, "0" is set as the calculated value (step S103).

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by "+1" (step S105), and the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" (step S106). ), and it is determined whether or not the calculation of the checksum is completed (step S107). If the calculation has not ended (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is finished (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process is finished.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of initial value random number update processing according to the first embodiment. This initial value random number update process is the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit design initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S111), the small hit design initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is updated by "+1". ' (step S113), and the winning design initial value random number is updated by '+1' (step S114), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the "jackpot design initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the special jackpot stop design, and the "small hit design initial value random number" is the random number that determines the small hit stop design of the special design. A random number that is the initial value of In addition, "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation game, and "hit pattern initial value random number" is the initial value of the random number that determines the winning pattern of the normal pattern fluctuation game. It is a random number that becomes It should be noted that the small winning symbol random number does not exist in models without a small winning, and the winning symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model. In this way, by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main processing, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing in the main processing described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs during the period from when the interrupt is permitted until when the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39) in the main process described above. The timer interrupt processing is processing executed by the CPU 111A.

Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S121). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S123) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, output processing (step S124) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) is performed based on the output data set in various processes. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device 200. is also generated within the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step S125), random number update processing 1 (step S126), and random number update processing 2 (step S127) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, it monitors whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the normal gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, and monitors errors ( Winning opening switch/status monitoring processing (step S128) is performed to check whether the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is open. In addition, a special figure game process (step S129) for performing processing relating to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game processing (step S130) for performing processing relating to the normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S131) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (step S131), the magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step S132) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine if there is any abnormality, board radio fraud monitoring processing (step S132) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining if there is any abnormality Monitoring processing (step S133) is performed. Then, the external information editing process (step S134) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input processing (step S123) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of input processing according to the first embodiment.

In this input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S142). S143). Next, prepare the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (step S144), prepare the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S145), prepare unused bit data (step S146). Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Next, bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and switch reading processing (step S148) is performed. Here, "preparation" in the first embodiment means setting a value in a register, but it is not limited to this, and values may be set in RWM or other memories.

Next, prepare the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (step S149), prepare the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (step S150), prepare unused bit data ( Step S151), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S152). Then, switch reading processing (step S153) is performed, and the input processing ends.

The switches monitored by the first input port 122 include, as shown in FIG. There are a power failure monitor signal (handled as unused in this process) generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply 400, a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball burnout switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch. The switches to be monitored at the second input port 123 include the starting port 1 switch 36a (“starting port 1 winning signal”), the starting port 2 switch 37a (by pattern branching, “starting port 2 winning signal”, “ordinary electric accessory 1 Also output as winning signal 1"), winning opening switch 35a ("normal winning opening winning signal"), big winning opening switch 38a ("special electric accessory 1 winning signal") and gate switch 34a ("normal symbol 1 There is a gate passing signal 1''). The switches monitored by the third input port 124 include the board radio wave sensor 62, the switch abnormality detection signal, the magnetic sensor 61, the illegal frame radio wave signal, and the payout busy signal.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S148 and S153) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of switch reading processing according to the first embodiment. In this switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S161). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S162), and after inverting the bit that needs to be inverted (step S163), the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is changed. (step S164). After that, it waits until the delay time (about 100 μs) until the second reading elapses (step S165).

After the delay time (approximately 100 μs) has elapsed, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read a second time (step S166). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S167), and after inverting the bit that needs to be reversed (step S168), the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is obtained. (step S169). After that, in the first and second readings, a definite bit pattern is created in which bits with the same state are set to 1 and bits with different states are set to 0 (step S170). It is set as a fixed bit (step S171).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is generated in which bits with the same state are set to 0 and bits with different states are set to 1 in the first and second readings (step S172). The product is taken and used as the previous holding bit (step S173). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to switch chattering or the like is removed. Then, the current defined bit and the previously held bit are synthesized and saved as the current defined state (step S174), the exclusive OR of the previous and current defined states is taken, and the result is saved as a rising edge (step S175). End switch read processing.

If the cycle of the timer interrupt is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing and compared with the result of the previous reading to change the signal. Although there is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been processed, there is a possibility that correct determination cannot be made if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above problem by performing switch read processing twice in one interrupt processing with a predetermined time difference. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S124) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of output processing according to the first embodiment. In this output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) for outputting segment data of the collective display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data output to the second output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the big winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S182).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device 50 is updated by "+1" within the range of "0" to "3" (step S183), and the digit of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is displayed. Line output data is obtained (step S184). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LED_00 to LED_31 of the collective display device 50, the round display, the special figure 1 reserved display, the special figure 1 pattern display, the special figure 2 pattern display, the general pattern display, the general pattern reservation display, and There is a state display (game state display such as time saving state and high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for external information output (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is "door/frame open" and "security signal".

After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (step S188).

Subsequently, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S189). The external information synthesized here includes "big win signal 1", "big win signal 2", "big win signal 3", "big win signal 4", "symbol determination number signal", "starting opening signal", and "main prize ball." signal”, etc. Next, the combined data and the output data for launch permission are combined (step S190), and the combined data is output to the fifth output port 137 for outputting external information and firing permission signal (step S191).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (step S192). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S193).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (step S194). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( step S195). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S196), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of payout command transmission processing of the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is processing for updating (increasing) the output count of the main prize ball signal, and the right column is processing for transmitting the payout command.

In the payout command transmission process, first, among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls), each , 255 wins, it is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the win count counter area 2 (step S201). If there is no count (step S201; N), the address of the winning prize counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and whether or not the check of the count numbers of all winning prize counter areas is completed. is determined (step S203).

In step S201, if it is determined that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted ("-1" update) (step S204), and the winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is obtained (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208), and the It is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209). In step S209, if it is determined that the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209; Y), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (step S211). Here, as a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), 1 pulse is output for every 10 payout schedules from the main board (game control device 100), and 10 payouts are issued from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output every time.

Next, in step S203, it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not greater than or equal to "0" (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the last step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. , no subtraction will be performed. In this way, the payout command is sent after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, rather than at each timer interrupt. In addition, the transmission of the payout command is also conditional on the payout control board being in a state where the prize balls can be paid out.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and if it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined by referring to the payout busy signal flag, not by referring to the state of the port. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to turn on (busy) are: "during payout operation", "during ball lending operation", "shot ball running out error", "overflow error", "framing radio wave illegal occurrence Medium", "Abnormality in payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor paid out balls)", "Insufficient payout error", "Excess payout error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls=the number of acquired game balls remaining) (=not 0).

Next, if the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215), and if there is no counting in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215 ;N), update the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (step S216), and determine whether or not all areas have been checked (step S217). If the check of all areas has not been completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, if there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by "-1" (step S218), and the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 A command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

If it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), if it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y) , When it is determined in step S217 that all areas have been checked (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 ends, this payout command transmission process ends.

[Random Number Update Processing 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of random number update processing 1 according to the first embodiment. This random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the big win symbol random numbers, small win symbol random numbers, winning random numbers, and winning symbol random numbers that are targets of the initial value random number updating process.

In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number of the normal pattern is waiting for the next initial value (start value) to be set (step S231). When the jackpot pattern random number of the normal pattern is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hitting pattern random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). In addition, when the jackpot pattern random number of the general pattern is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the jackpot pattern initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), and the next time of the loaded jackpot pattern random number of the general pattern is loaded. is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S233). After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

If the small winning design random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). Also, when the small-hit design random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small-hit design initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small-hit design random number. is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S236). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning random number is waiting for setting of the next initial value (start value) (step S237).

If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; N), it is determined whether or not the winning design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240). If the winning random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S237; Y), the winning initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S238), and the next initial value of the loaded winning random number is set to the corresponding random number counter ( random number area) is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value (step S239). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for setting of the next initial value (start value) (step S240).

If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the winning symbol random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S240; Y), the winning symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S241), and the next initial value of the loaded winning symbol random number is used. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set in a register (start value setting register) (step S242), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random Number Update Processing 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of random number update processing 2 according to the first embodiment. This random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display games of special figures 1 and 2 . In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers. is to be updated, and the update target is switched each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, update processing is performed at different interrupt times for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach fluctuation mode determination) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. is configured as follows.

In this random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is set to a number from "0" to "3". The range is updated (step S251). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S253). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit judgment value for each type of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random numbers have made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a random counter such as a counter (hereinafter referred to as an M1 counter) used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 series microcomputer used as the game microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. A counter value is loaded (step S254). Randomness can be imparted to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired to mask the value of the M1 counter (step S255). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, is set in the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower order of the M1 counter Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the value remaining after masking the value of the M1 counter by masking the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as the mask "1" is added to the mask update value, the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S257), and the process proceeds to step S259. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S258). ), and the process proceeds to step S259. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid the fact that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added afterward, the value before addition will not change. be.

Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259). Step S260), and the process proceeds to step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. is set (step S261), and the process proceeds to step S262.

In step S262, a value obtained by adding the additional value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether or not this new random value is greater than the upper limit determination value obtained in step S253. (Step S263). If the new random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step S263; N), the new random number is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step S263; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number is used again as a new random number (step S264). The random number or 2-byte random number is saved in the lower random number area (step S265).

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number update process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), a new random number (if a new random number is calculated again, that value) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S267). , the random number update process 2 ends.

Thus, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variation display games. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area of the start winning port 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning hole switch/state monitoring process, first, a winning hole monitoring table (for example, a port to which a detection signal from a count switch is input) corresponding to the big winning hole switch 38a in the big winning hole (special variable winning device 38) and data indicating the bit position in the port of the signal) is prepared (step S271). Next, a fraud & winning monitoring process (step S272) is executed to monitor whether there is fraudulent winning of a prize (unauthorized winning) even though the winning opening is not open, and to detect normal winning. .

After that, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S273), to monitor whether there is an illegal winning or not, and to detect a normal winning. Detected fraud & winning monitoring process (step S274) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general electrical system is prepared (step S275), and fraud & winning monitoring processing ( Step S276) is executed.

Next, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches (starting opening 1 switch 36a, winning opening switch 35a of general winning opening 35 in this case) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S277), and the number of winnings is updated. A number counter update process (step S278) is performed.

Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for the error state of the gaming machine 10 is to be monitored this time is set to "0". to "3" (step S279). After that, depending on the value of the state scan counter, any of the switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, the shot ball failure error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout abnormality error A gaming machine status monitoring table 1 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on this (step S280). Then, gaming machine state check processing (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting an error monitoring target based on one of glass frame opening, main body frame opening, frame radio wave fraud, and touch switch according to the value of the state scan counter. (Step S282). Then, gaming machine state check processing (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284). End the process. In this case, there is no gaming machine status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the game machine state based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc., according to the value of the state scan counter. A gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared for setting the monitoring of the game machine (step S285). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S286) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed, a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch/status monitoring process is terminated. Note that the payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is performed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring period is 16 ms.

[Fraud & Winning Monitoring Process]
Next, the cheating & winning monitoring process (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fraud & winning monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. Each winning slot monitoring table prepared in the winning slot switch/error monitoring process contains "data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)", "lower address of fraud monitoring information", "fraudulent winning number area lower address", "Illegal winning error notification command", "Illegal winning number upper limit (number of illegal occurrence determination)", "Winning gate switch table address" and "Notification timer update information (permit/update)" Information shall be defined.

This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the big winning opening switch 38 a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37 a of the normal variable winning device 37 . With regard to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) and general electric power (normal variable winning device 37), it is easy to forcibly open the opening and closing member, insert the game ball, and pay out the prize ball. In addition to monitoring fraud.

In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S292). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the state of the gaming machine is the big winning opening switch 38a. In addition, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the state of the gaming machine is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the normal hit.

Then, if it is the fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). Also, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; Y), the number of target fraudulent winnings is updated by "+1" (step S294), and the number of fraudulent winnings after addition is the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored ( For example, 5) or more (step S295).

The reason why the determination number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball is caught in the valid period of the count switch. This is to avoid immediately judging that the game is fraudulent when a prize is won after the time period or when noise is added to the signal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the user from easily judging that the transaction is fraudulent even if it is not necessarily fraudulent.

If the number is less than the judgment number (step S295; N), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is equal to or greater than the judgment number (step S295; Y), the fraudulent prize winning number is kept at the fraud occurrence judgment number (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target fraudulent prize winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, a target fraudulent occurrence command is prepared (step S298), a fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S299), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S310). ).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300), and winning number counter update processing (step S301) for setting winning balls is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and it is determined whether or not update of the notification timer is permitted (step S303). Then, if updating of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), this fraud & prize-winning monitoring process ends. Information for which update of the notification timer is not permitted includes the big winning opening switch 38a. This is because two switches are used to monitor one big winning slot. If the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer will be updated at double speed, and as a result, the illegal timer will time out in half the specified time. In order to avoid such a timer update, updating at the timing of the big winning opening switch, which performs the monitoring process first, is prohibited. In addition, when the update of the notification timer is permitted as in the large winning opening switch and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37 which perform monitoring processing later (step S303; Y), the target notification timer is "0". If not, it is updated by "-1" (step S304). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to "0".

Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the game machine state monitoring target winning prize opening switch is one large winning prize opening switch 38a, and when the game machine state monitoring target winning prize opening switch is the other large winning prize opening switch 38a. is not allowed. As a result, the update of the notification timer is doubled in regards to the fraudulent notification of the special variable winning device 38, preventing time-up in half the specified time (eg 60000ms). In addition, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the state of the gaming machine is the big winning opening switch 38a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is "0" (step S305). End the process. Also, if the value is "0" (step S305; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step S306), and an illegal winning cancellation flag is used as the fraud flag. is prepared (step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308).

When the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of fraudulent winnings is It is cleared (step S309), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). Also, if the value of the notification timer does not become "0" (step S308; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (step S310; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S311), and effect command setting processing is performed ( Step S312), the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, a fraud notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the occurrence of fraud, and a fraudulent award fraud cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the cancellation of the fraud, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. It will be done.

[Processing for updating winning number counter]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (steps S278, S301) in the above winning opening switch/state monitoring process and fraud & winning monitoring process will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flow chart of winning number counter update processing according to the first embodiment. Note that the winning table of the winning opening monitoring tables prepared in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process contains information on the number of repetitions and data for determining whether or not there is an input defined for each switch. (monitoring switch bit)", "lower address of winning number counter area 1" and "lower address of winning number counter area 2" are defined.

In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening monitoring table (step S321), and whether or not there is an input (exactly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. (step S322).

If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). Also, if there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs. (Step S325). Then, if no overflow has occurred (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the prize number counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated within the range from "0" to "65535". If overflow occurs (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is passed.

Next, the value of target win number counter area 2 is loaded (step S327), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S328), and it is determined whether or not there is an overflow (step S329). If no overflow has occurred (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). As a result, the win number counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in the range from "0" to "255". If overflow occurs (step S329; Y), the process of step S330 is skipped.

When the table address is updated to the address of the next record in step S331, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S332). If the monitoring of all switches has not been completed (step S332; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S322). Also, when the monitoring of all the switches is finished (step S332; Y), the win number counter update process is finished. Through the above processing, prize balls are set according to the winning.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check processing (step S286) in the above-described winning hole switch/state monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of gaming machine state check processing according to the first embodiment. Each gaming machine status monitoring table prepared in the winning slot switch/status monitoring process contains "lower address of top address of status monitoring area", "port of switch control area where target signal information is stored" lower address of input state area", "mask data for extracting only bits of the target signal", "signal ON determination data", "state OFF command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the error notification end command)", Information of "status ON command (meaning error notification start command in case of error system)", "status OFF monitoring timer comparison value" and "status ON monitoring timer comparison value" are defined respectively.

In this gaming machine state check processing, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S341), and whether or not the signal to be monitored is on, that is, whether or not the state indicates an error is determined. Determine (step S342). In addition, when the signal to be monitored is not on, it means a normal state without an error with respect to the error system, and means a non-touched state with respect to the touch switch. In addition, when the signal to be monitored is on, it means an error (abnormal, illegal) state with respect to the error system, and it means a touched state with respect to the touch switch.

In step S342, if the signal is not ON (step S342; N), a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (step S343), and the target state OFF command is obtained and prepared (step S344). Thereafter, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state are compared (step S349).

On the other hand, if the signal is ON (step S342; Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step S346), and a target state ON command is obtained and prepared (step S347). After that, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (step S348), and the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state are compared (step S349).

If the value of the target signal control region matches the current signal state (step S349; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352 ), it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). If the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state do not match (step S349; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control region. (step S350). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S351), the target state monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value. (step S353).

If the target state monitoring timer value has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the target state monitoring timer value is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by "-1" to remain at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S354). ), the prepared status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S355).

Then, when the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S355; Y), this gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S355; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S356), and the prepared state is turned off. An effect command setting process for transmitting either a command or a state ON command is performed (step S357), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

[Payment busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process described above will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flow chart of payout busy signal check processing according to the first embodiment.

In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S361), and if the payout busy signal is not on (step S361; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag ( Step S362), and set the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (step S363). For example, 32 ms is set as the OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

In step S361, when the payout busy signal is ON (step S361; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S364), and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). For example, 32 ms is set as the ON determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

Next, the value of the busy signal state field is compared with the current signal state (step S366). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the current signal state (step S366; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), It is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the timer comparison value (step S370). If the value of the busy signal state area and the current signal state do not match (step S366; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area ( step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), this payout busy signal check process is terminated. Further, when the value of the busy signal monitoring timer becomes equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "-1" and held at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S371). , the prepared status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and this payout busy signal check process is terminated.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S129) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed. In the special figure game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted. Then, before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the winning, the game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning hole switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the big winning hole switch 38a (big winning hole switch 1, big winning hole switch 2) provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, refer to branch to the processing corresponding to the special game processing number A special figure game sequence branch table is set in a register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the setting of the special figure stop display time, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big win, fanfare commands are set according to the kind of big win, and a big winning opening for each big win is made. Setting of fanfare time according to the opening pattern, processing during special figure display (step A10) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of openings, and the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate are performed. A fanfare/interval process (step A11) is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, and if it is the final round, an ending command is set; A process (step A12) during the opening of the big prize winning opening, which performs a process of setting information necessary for ball processing, etc., is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is not the final round, the fanfare/interval processing is performed. A large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) is performed to set the time for the remaining balls in the big winning hole to be discharged, and to set the information necessary for performing the big win ending process.

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal processing is performed.
At step A7, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. Processing (step A15) during a small winning fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the transition process during the small hit, the command for the end screen of the small hit, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. Perform small hit middle processing (step A16).

At step A7, if the special game process number is "9", small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing small hit end processing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), symbol variation control processing related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A20) is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A21), the symbol variation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special figure game process exit. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processes are executed. Do.

Incidentally, a small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of a conditional device, and a big win is a special result that accompanies the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning device 38 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the starting port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a winning monitoring table for starting opening 1 (starting opening winning opening 36) is prepared (step A101), hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and whether or not there is a winning for starting opening 1. It is determined whether or not (step A103).

At step A103, when it is determined that there is no winning to the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the starting port 1 (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not during special figure time saving (during general electricity support) (step A104) . It should be noted that the determination in step A104 is based on whether or not the gaming state is in the general electricity support mode, and does not include the level of the probability state.

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104; Y), prepare a right-handed instruction notification command (step A105), and perform production command setting processing (step A106) . That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a prize is not won unless the starting port 1 (starting prize winning port 36) is hit to the left, and a prize is not won to the normal variable prize winning device 37 if the player is hit to the right. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting. is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the production control device 300 and perform a notification (warning) instructing to hit right by the production control device 300.

Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) (step A107), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, start gate 2 (ordinary variable prize winning device 37) win monitoring table is prepared (step A109), hard random number acquisition processing (step A110) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a prize for start gate 2. (Step A111).

When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the starting port 2 (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, when it is determined that there is a prize to the starting port 2 (step A111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the normal variable winning It is determined whether or not the device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (step A112), and when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is in operation (step A112; Y), step A114. , and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, in step A112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

At step A113, if it is determined that the general electric fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the information of the suspension by the starting port 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step A114), special figure Starter switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the starter switch monitoring processing is terminated. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hardware random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment.

In the hardware random number acquisition process, first, out of the starting gate 1 (starting winning gate 36) and the starting gate 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37), the non-winning information of the starting gate to be monitored is set (step A121), It is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored starter switch of the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a (step A122). If there is no input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the random number latch register to be monitored (step A122; Y). A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A125). Then, out of the starting gate 1 (starting winning gate 36) and the starting gate 2 (normal variable prize winning device 37), the winning information of the starting gate to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hardware random number acquisition process is terminated. .

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108, A115) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start opening switch common processing of the first embodiment.

Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a and the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.
In the special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the starting opening switch to be monitored is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of output times of the starting signal is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the number of output times overflows (step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), step A134 is skipped and the process proceeds to step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" when updated by "+1", and it is determined that the output count overflows.

Next, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether or not the update target special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the monitored starting port switch is less than the upper limit value ( step A135). When the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. If the special figure pending number to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the special figure pending number to be updated (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) is updated by "+1" ( Step A136), save the start gate winning flag to be monitored (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared at step A125 is saved in the RWM jackpot random number storage area ( Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a win to the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) (step A142).
At step A142, when it is determined that the prize is not awarded to the starting port 1 (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

On the other hand, in step A142, when it is determined that the winning to the starting port 1 (step A142; Y), extract the small winning design random number, prepare (step A143), RWM small winning design random number Save in the storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.

Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step A147), perform the effect command setting process (step A148), and perform the special figure starting opening switch common processing finish.

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and extracts a special figure variable display game. A starting winning memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory that is the right to execute. In addition, the start winning memory means (RAM 111C) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 1 (start winning opening 36) as a first start memory up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the mouth 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) in the above-described starting opening switch common process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure reservation information determination processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, the start opening winning flag saved at step A137 is checked to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36) (step A151).

At step A151, when it is determined that the prize is not awarded to the starting gate 1 (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A151, when it is determined that the winning to the starting port 1 (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not during the special figure time reduction (step A152).

In step A152, when it determines with it being in special figure time saving (step A152; Y), it complete|finishes special figure reservation information determination processing.
On the other hand, at step A152, when it is determined that it is not during the special figure time saving (step A152; N), it is determined whether it is during the big hit or the small hit (step A153).

In step A153, when it determines with it being during a big hit or a small hit (step A153; Y), it complete|finishes special figure reservation information determination processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit is not in progress or the small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. Big hit determination processing (step A154) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (step A155). If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starting switch is set (step A156), and the big hit pattern random number prepared in step A140 is checked. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) (step A158).
At step A158, when it is determined that the starting gate 1 is not won (step A158; N), set stop symbol information (step A163), shift to the processing of step A164, and thereafter. process.

On the other hand, in step A158, when it is determined that the winning to the starting port 1 (step A158; Y), whether or not the big hit random number coincides with the small hit determination value determines whether or not it is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A159) for determining is performed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A160). Then, if the judgment result is not a small hit (step A160; N), stop symbol information for losing is set (step A163), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the judgment result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit design random number check table is set (step A161), and stop design information corresponding to the small hit design random number prepared in step A143 is displayed. It acquires (step A162), moves to the process of step A164, and performs the subsequent processes.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing (step A165) is performed. Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step A167) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. do

After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A168), production command setting processing (step A169) is performed, and the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, a look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not there will be a special result, etc.). Judgment) constitutes a preliminary judgment means. The random number value stored in correspondence with the starting memory is judged in advance not only when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. good.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special game state (step A201). If the process is in progress during the opening of the big winning opening (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205 and the subsequent processes are performed. If the large winning opening opening process is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A202).

If the large winning hole remaining balls are being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the big winning hole residual ball processing is not being performed (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not processing is being performed during the small winning (during the small winning game state) (step A203).

When it is in process during small hit (step A203; Y), it transfers to the process of step A205. If it is not during small hit processing (step A203; N), it is determined whether or not small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A204).

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. When the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.

In addition, since the value of the special game processing number does not move until the special game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game can be checked by checking the value of the special game processing number. can be checked. Therefore, the value of the special game processing number is checked to determine whether or not the big winning opening is being processed, the remaining balls of the big winning opening are being processed, the small winning balls are being processed, and the remaining small winning balls are being processed. do it.

Then, "0" is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening to be added in this big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A205), and whether there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1. is determined (step A206).

If there is no input to the big winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A210 and the subsequent processes are performed. If there is an input to the large winning slot switch 1 (step A206; Y), a large winning slot count command is prepared (step A207), effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to " +1” (step A209).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning slot switch 2 (step A210), and if there is no input to the big winning slot switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214, Perform subsequent processing. If there is an input to the big winning slot switch 2 (step A210; Y), a big winning slot count command is prepared (step A211), effect command setting processing (step A212) is performed, and the winning counter value is set to " +1” update (step A213).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214), and if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed. finish. If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not processing for the remaining balls in the big winning opening is in progress (step A215). At step A215; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

If it is not during the big winning opening remaining ball processing (step A215; N), it is determined whether or not the small winning remaining ball processing is being performed (step A216), and if it is during the small winning remaining ball processing (step A216; At Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

If the small hit remaining balls are not being processed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter ("1" or "2") is added to the big winning opening count (step A217), and the big winning opening count is It is determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) (step A218).

If the large winning opening count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the large winning opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the large winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information in the special game processing timer area is cleared to zero (step A220 ), it is determined whether or not during small hit processing (step A221).

If it is not during the small winning process (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the small winning process is in progress (step A221; Y), the value for ending the small winning opening operation is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the big winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the special figure game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure usual process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is "0" (step A306). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 pending number is "0" (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A311), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (Step A311; N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A312).

Subsequently, prepare a customer waiting demo command (step A313), perform production command setting processing (step A314), perform special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step A315), and end the special figure normal processing . On the other hand, at step A311, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A311; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

Also, in step A301, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" (step A301; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) is performed, and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number A pending number command is prepared (step A303), and effect command setting processing (step A304) is performed. Then, the processing shift setting process (step A305) during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure usual processing is ended.

Also, in step A306, if the special figure 1 reserved number is not "0" (step A306; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number A pending number command is prepared (step A308), and effect command setting processing (step A309) is performed. Then, the processing transition setting processing (step A310) during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A302) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is preferentially executed over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure normal process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing shift setting process 1 (step A315) in the above-described special figure normal processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, is set as the processing number (step A321), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A322).

Then, the information in the fluctuating pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A323), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 is completed. do.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A307) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A331), and the first special A big win flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the deviation information and the big win information to the big win flag 1 for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a big win.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop design (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set. (Step A335). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A302) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described using FIG. Figure 31 is the figure which shows the flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of 1st execution form.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 30 is performed for the second start memory. It is done as

In the special figure 2 variation start process, first, the special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here special figure 2) is saved in the variation pattern discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special A big win flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting deviation information and big win information to the big win flag 2 for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a big win.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set. (Step A345). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the big-hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag area (step A351), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, load the jackpot random number from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of RWM, prepare (step A353), and store the information of the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) "0" is cleared (step A354). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit judgment processing (step A355) for judging whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and whether the judgment result of the big-hit judgment processing is a big hit. It is determined whether or not (step SA356).

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357 ), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number matches the small hit determination value is a small hit or not. A small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine whether or not the judgment result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA359).

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A351. (Step A360), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the loss information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is one of "big win", "minor win", and "lose".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big hit flag 2 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the big-hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (step A372), and store the information of the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) "0" is cleared (step A373). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, a big-hit judgment processing (step A374) is performed to judge whether or not the big-hit is a big hit, and whether the judgment result of the big-hit judgment processing is a big hit or not. It is determined whether or not (step SA375).

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information was saved in step A371 (step A376 ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big-hit judgment process (step A374) is not a big-hit (step A375; N), the big-hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2. Thus, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, details of the jackpot determination processing (steps A154, A355, A374) in the above-described special figure reservation information determination processing, jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big hit determination process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit decision value of the jackpot decision value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit decision value (step A382). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), set a loss as the judgment result (step A387), and end the jackpot judgment processing. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a loss, "other than a big hit (small hit or loss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), it is a loss. Therefore, "other than big win (lost)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step A383). .

Then, if it is in the high probability (step A383; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step A384), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value ( Step A386). Also, if it is not a high probability state (step A383; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step A385), determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386).

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), the judgment result is set to be lost (step A387), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, if the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), a small Since it is a hit or a loss, "other than a big win (minor win or loss)" is set as the judgment result (step A387). On the other hand, if the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and if the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is a loss. , "Other than a big hit (lost)" is set as a judgment result (step A387).

If the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, details of the small hit determination processing (steps A159, A358) in the special figure reservation information determination processing and the big hit flag 1 setting processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small hit determination processing of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391). In addition, the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination is used to perform the small hit determination. That is, the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value are set so as not to overlap each other.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is a loss, a loss is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment process is terminated.

Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), set the small hit upper limit judgment value, and check whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value. Determine (step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is a loss, the judgment result is set to be a loss (step A393), and the small hit judgment process is terminated.

Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394), and the small hit judgment process is terminated. do.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). 1) to load a jackpot pattern random number (step A402). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step A403), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop design information table is set (step A405), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the stop symbol on the display device 41 . Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of the first embodiment, the performance mode shifts with the winning as a trigger, and the shift destination of the performance mode after the winning is changed according to the type of the winning pattern (the type of the big winning pattern or the small winning pattern). In addition, if it becomes a specific jackpot pattern (for example, 4R probability variation pattern) among the jackpots in special figure 1, depending on whether the game state is in probability variation, the production mode of the transition destination is dedicated to confirmation of probability variation It is determined whether to shift to a production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether it is a probability variation or not. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and if it is a small hit (step A410; Y), the special figure 1 A small-hit design random number is loaded from the small-hit design random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A411). Next, a special figure 1 small hit design table is set (step A412), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A413).

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

Also, if the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern number area (step A416), and the losing stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area. Save (step A417) and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A419), and production command setting processing (step A420) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the information in the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to "0" (step A422). , Clear the information in the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to "0" (step A423), and end the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 stop design setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit pattern random number storage area ( A jackpot pattern random number is loaded from (for reserved number 1) (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot design table is set (step A433), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 2 stop design number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and the stop symbol on the display device 41 . Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, the production mode of the transition destination becomes a special production mode in which the probability variation is determined regardless of which jackpot pattern. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A431; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern number area (step A440), and the losing stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop pattern pattern area. Then (step A441), a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A443), and production command setting processing (step A444) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information in the special figure 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to "0" (step A446 ), to end the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36), and executes the first variable display game at the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). A variable display game executing means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A334, A344) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 variation start process and special figure 2 variation start process will be described using FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure information setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low/high probability, with/without time saving) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the like.

In the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

Next, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop design pattern are acquired (step A454).

Next, the first half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of loss, so in cases other than loss, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. A variation group includes multiple variation patterns, and when determining a variation pattern, first select a variation group, and then select one variation pattern from this variation group. ing.

Next, the second half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop design pattern are acquired (step A460).

Next, the second half variation group selection pointer and offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process ends. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of loss, the rate of reach changes according to the number of holds (the rate of reach is lower when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than losses, the number of holds is distributed in the second half as a result. does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, special figure 1 variation start processing, and variation pattern setting processing (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 variation start will be described using FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of variation pattern setting processing according to the first embodiment.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

In the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step A471), the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), and the target fluctuation pattern The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step A473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. In addition, since the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the size for losing is set to 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss (step A474), and if it is a loss (step A474; Y), 2-byte distribution processing (step A475) is performed, and step It shifts to the processing of A477 and performs the subsequent processing. If it is not lost (step A474; N), sorting processing (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to step A477, and subsequent processing is performed.

Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the reserved number 1), Prepare (step A478). Then, the allocation process (step A479) is performed, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired, and saved in the second half variation number area (step A480). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), and prepared. (step A484). After that, sorting processing (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired, and saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting processing ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A337, A347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a change start information setting process according to the first embodiment.

In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the information in the random number storage area for the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is obtained (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is obtained (step A495).

Then, the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A500 ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable design discrimination flag is updated by "-1" (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable design discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information on the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random values stored in the starting storage means (RAM 111C). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the starting memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and according to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command containing information about a pattern and a stop information command containing information about extension of stop time are mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 1) (step A310) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described using FIG. 41 . FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure fluctuation process shift setting process (special figure 1) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure fluctuation processing transition setting process (special figure 1), first, "1", which is the processing number related to the special figure fluctuation processing, is set as the processing number (step A511), and processed in the special figure game processing number area Save the number (step A512).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). In addition, the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 is a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal. After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the flashing control timer in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (the flashing cycle timer of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A516), and the processing shift setting process (special figure 1) during special figure fluctuation is terminated.

[Special figure fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the processing shift setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 2) (step A305) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 42 . FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 2) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure fluctuation processing transition setting process (special figure 2), first, "1", which is the processing number related to the special figure fluctuation processing, is set as the processing number (step A521), and processed in the special figure game processing number area Save the number (step A522).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A523), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (turning on the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the flashing control timer in the special figure 2 flashing control timer area (the flashing cycle timer of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) Save (set) (step A526), and end the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process (special figure 2).

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing during special figure fluctuation of the first embodiment.

In the special figure fluctuating process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, the display time is set to 600 ms when the stop symbol pattern is the winning symbol pattern, and the display time is set to 600 ms when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small winning symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern, the big-hit symbol pattern, and the small-hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set for each.

Next, the process shift setting process (step A603) during special figure display is performed, and the process during special figure display is completed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special figure display transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process transition setting process (step A603) in the special figure changing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing shift setting processing during special figure display of the first embodiment.

In the special figure display process transition setting process, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure display process, is set as the process number (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A612).

Next, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and the signal regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is a signal that turns off the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation. In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation end is the signal which turns off the signal during special design 2 fluctuation.

Then, the initial value of the control timer (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the control timer area of the pattern fixed number of times signal related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area ( Step A616), as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 in the special figure 2 variation control flag area Then (step A617), the process transition setting process during special figure display is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a diagram (Part 1) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure display according to the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure display according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag area of RWM is cleared ( Step A702).

Then, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), clear the information of the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of RWM (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is determined to be a big hit (step A705; Y), the second special figure fluctuation display game big hit (special figure 2 A signal relating to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and a round number upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 jackpot is a signal that turns on the condition device operating signal, a signal that turns on the continuous action device operating signal, and a signal that turns on the special symbol 2 winning signal. include.

On the other hand, in step A705, as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, if it is determined that there is no jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706). (Step A706; Y), the test signal related to the start of the first special figure variation display game jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM, (step A707), round A number upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 jackpot is a signal to turn on the condition device operating signal, a signal to turn on the character continuous operation device operating signal, and a signal to turn on the special symbol 1 winning signal. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), obtain the round number upper limit value ("16" or "4" in the case of the first embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information, It is saved in the round number upper limit area of RWM (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information to set the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714), and effect command setting processing (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A717).

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A718, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when a jackpot with balls (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and a jackpot without balls (so-called definite jackpot, etc., jackpot opening). When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned on at the time of the big hit in the time saving state, and is turned off at other times. In addition, the big win 3 signal is turned on when the big win is with balls, and is turned off when the big win is with no balls.

After that, set the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game, and the big winning opening opening information. (Step A719), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). This stores the information of the probability state of the special figure and the time saving state when the special result occurs. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, the information of the large winning slot illegal winning number area of the big winning slot (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning slot corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared. A flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag for the fraud monitoring period for the big winning opening (step A723). Thereafter, the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the processing during special figure display ends.

On the other hand, at step A706, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

At step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), high probability fluctuation number update processing (step A726), production mode information check processing (step A727 ) is performed to determine whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step A728).

At step A728, if it is determined that it is not in the special figure high probability (step A728; N), the decoration special figure command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and the production command setting process (Step A730) is performed. Next, a small winning fanfare command is prepared (step A731), effect command setting processing (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733 to perform subsequent processing.

Also, in step A728, when it is determined that it is in the special figure high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733 and the subsequent processes are performed. Thus, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the occurrence of a small win opens the big winning opening, but the occurrence of a small win. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order not to make the player aware of the above.

Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the process transition setting process 1 (step A734) during small hit fanfare is performed, and the process during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A735), the production mode information check process regarding the setting of the production mode (step A736) is performed, the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the production mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the production remaining rotation speed matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A738). In addition, the switching preparation remaining number of rotations is a different value in all of the plurality of presentation modes (number of rotations: for example, mode A is 4 times, mode B is 3 times, mode C is 8 times, etc.). It may be the same value (number of rotations) in any one of the plurality of production modes, or the same value (number of rotations) in all production modes of the plurality of production modes. ).

In step A738, when it is determined that the number of rotations remaining in the production and the number of rotations remaining in switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display. Terminate intermediate processing.

On the other hand, in step A738, if it is determined that the number of rotations remaining in the production and the number of rotations in preparation for switching match (step A738; Y), the production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command is set. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the process during special figure display ends. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a look-ahead production from several rotations before the production mode switches, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, the production is performed across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction etc. from occurring in

[High-probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high probability fluctuation frequency update process (steps A726, A735) in the process during special figure display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of high-probability variation count update processing according to the first embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not in the special figure high probability (step A751), if not in the special figure high probability (step A751; N), high probability fluctuation number update process exit.

If it is in the special figure high probability (step A751; Y), the number of high probability fluctuations managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in a high probability state is updated by "-1" (step A752), high It is determined whether or not the number of probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753).

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. If the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753; Y), the information in the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and the signal regarding the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area ( Step A755). It should be noted that the signal relating to the high-probability end is a signal that turns off the big win 2 signal.

And the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving (high probability & no time saving or high probability & time saving) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). In addition, the signal related to the end of high probability & time reduction is a signal to turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal to turn off A signal to turn off, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Also, even in the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes in the general figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), and the general pattern low probability flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and the signal related to the left hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). It should be noted that the signal relating to the instruction to hit left is a signal that turns off the firing position designation signal 1 . Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high-probability variation count update process is terminated.

[Production mode information check process]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727 and A736) in the process during special figure display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect mode information check processing of the first embodiment.

In the presentation mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771), and if the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), The production mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed, for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state. is.

If the next mode transition information is not an update no code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation number which is the executable number of the special figure fluctuation display game until the change of the effect mode is updated by "-1" (step A772 ), and it is determined whether or not the number of rotations remaining for the effect is "0" (step A773). The processing of step A772 serves as counting means for counting the number of executions of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game.

If the number of rotations remaining for effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. If the number of rotations remaining in the production is "0" (step A773; Y), that is, in the case of changing the production mode from the next special figure variation display game, the production mode information address table is set (step A774), The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

The production mode number of the production mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step A776), and the production remaining rotation number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the production remaining rotation number area (step A777). The production mode to be transferred (the production mode of the transfer destination) can be known from the next mode transfer information already saved before step A776. The next mode transition information about the next performance mode of the performance mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). It should be noted that the process of step A776, production mode execution control means for performing execution control of one of a plurality of production modes (game mode) production mode (game mode) corresponding to the counting result by the counting means (step A772) (game mode execution control means).

A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery time transmission command area, that is, if the state of the probability does not change (step A780; Y), the command is not sent to the production control device 300 production mode End the information check process. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area when power is restored (step A780; N), save the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (step A781), and set the effect command. Processing (step A782) is performed.

Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed. Then, prepare a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count (step A785), perform production command setting processing (step A786), and determine whether or not the new production mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A787).

If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. When the new production mode is a mode for hitting left (step A787; Y), a left hitting instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), production command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and production mode information is checked. End the process.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A724) in the processing during special figure display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare/interval process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

In the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set as the process number (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A792).

Next, a signal relating to the start of a big hit (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signals relating to the start of the big win include, for example, a signal to turn on the big win 1 signal (output with the big win + small win) and a signal to turn on the big win 4 signal (output with the big win).

Next, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). Signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are, for example, a signal to turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal to turn off A signal to turn off, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

After that, clear the information in the round number area that manages the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A795), save the number without time reduction in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save the normal pattern low probability flag in the area (step A797).

Then, to clear the information of the variable pattern discrimination flag area (step A798), clear the information of the high probability notification flag area in order to turn off the gaming state display LED related to the display of the high probability state (step A799), Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), special figure fluctuation that can be executed in a high probability state Clear the information in the high-probability fluctuation count area that manages the number of times of display games (step A802). This ends the high probability state and the time saving state, and becomes the normal probability state and normal state.

After that, the number of the production mode 1 is saved in the production mode number area (step A803), and since the game control device 100 manages the production mode, the information of the production remaining rotation number area is cleared (step A804). , the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (turning on the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806). The number in the state is saved (step A807), and the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information of the effect mode is once cleared along with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process 1 (step A734) during small hit fanfare in the process during special figure display described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flow chart of processing transition setting processing 1 during small winning fanfare of the first embodiment.

In the small-win fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1, first, "7", which is the process number relating to the small-win fanfare mid-process, is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A812). Then, the small winning fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and the signal regarding the start of the small winning is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal relating to the start of the small win is, for example, a signal that turns on the 1 big win signal (outputs the big win + the small win).

Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal relating to the start of the small win is, for example, a signal that turns on the special symbol 1 small win signal.

Then, the information in the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A816), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A817). Then, the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818). The signal related to the instruction to hit to the right is, for example, a signal that turns on firing position designation signal 1 .

Then, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the setting processing 1 for transition to processing during small win fanfare is completed.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process (step A11) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare/during-interval processing of the first embodiment.

In the fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by "+1" (step A901), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step A903) is performed.

After that, a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special game state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether or not it is greater than the value (step A906).

If the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), the opening time of the large winning opening for short opening (0.2 s in the case of the first embodiment) is set to the special game processing timer area. Save (step A907), perform processing transition setting processing during large winning opening opening (step A909) to open the large winning opening, and end fanfare/interval processing.

Also, if the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching judgment value (step A906; N), the opening time of the large winning opening for long opening (29 s in the case of the first embodiment) is set to the special game processing timer area. (step A908), the processing transition setting processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step A909) is performed to open the large winning opening, and the fanfare/interval processing ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot pattern, (1) 4R, big winning mouth opening information 1 (all short open), (2) 16R, big winning mouth opening information 2 (all long open), ( 3) 16R, big prize opening information 3 (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), (4) 4R, big prize opening information 4 (all long open), (5) 16R, big prize Mouth open information 5 (all long open), (6) 16R, big winning mouth open information 6 (1 to 8R long open, 9 to 16R short open), (7) 16R, big winning mouth open information 7 (1 ~4R is long open, 5~16R is short open) is set.

Therefore, in the big winning gate operation determination table, the big winning gate opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value "0" are stored, and the big winning gate opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value "16" are stored. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching judgment value "4", the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching judgment value "4", the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching judgment value "16" , big winning opening opening information 6 data and opening switching judgment value "8", and big winning opening opening information 7 data and opening switching judgment value "4" are stored in association with each other. When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, long opening is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value, short opening is performed.

[Processing transition setting processing during opening of the big winning gate]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the big winning opening in the fanfare/interval process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the process transition setting process during the opening of the big winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the processing transition setting process during the opening of the big winning opening, first, "4", which is the processing number related to the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, is set as the processing number (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area. (step A912). After that, a signal relating to the opening start of the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal relating to the start of opening the big winning opening is, for example, a signal that turns on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 .

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing transition setting processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Processing during the opening of the big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the big winning opening (step A12) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the process during opening of the big winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the process during the opening of the big winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit area of RWM to determine whether or not the current round is the final round. is determined (step A1001).

If it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining ball processing time for the final (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1008), and an ending command is prepared (step A1009), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the number of rounds is It is determined whether or not the open switching determination value is exceeded (A1004).

When the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005). , an interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds does not exceed the open switching judgment value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1006). , an interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

After that, effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, large winning hole remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and processing during the large winning hole opening is completed.
[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the large winning hole remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) in the above-described large winning hole open process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the big winning hole remaining ball process transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, "5", which is the processing number related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing, is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area. (step A1022). Then, the OFF data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process is completed.

[Large prize mouth residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning hole remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the big winning hole remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit area of RWM to determine whether the current round is the final round. is determined (step A1101).

If it is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special game mode flag save area (step A1111), the loaded flag, the big winning opening information, the ending time corresponding to the stop pattern pattern ( For example, 1.9s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1113), the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is completed.

If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is obtained (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A1105), and the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value. If so (step A1105; Y), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is not greater than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down production system (step A1106), and the large winning opening opening information is If the value is not a rank-down effect type value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

If the big winning opening opening information is a rank down effect system value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) ( Step A1107), if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), the interval time for the rank down effect (for example, 3.6 s) is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. , the subsequent processing is performed.

Then, the interval time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1109), fanfare/in-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the big winning hole remaining ball processing ends.

[Fanfare/In-interval process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described large winning hole remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare/in-interval process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment.

In the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 2, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set as the process number (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A1122). Then, a signal relating to the end of opening the big winning hole (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). It should be noted that the signal relating to the end of the opening of the big winning opening is, for example, a signal that turns off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 .

Then, the fanfare/in-interval process transition setting process 2 ends.
[Jackpot end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot ending process transition setting process (step A1114) in the above-described big winning hole remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot ending process transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end processing transition setting processing, first, "6", which is the processing number related to the jackpot end processing, is set as the processing number (step A1131), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A1132).

Then, a signal relating to the end of opening the big winning hole (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). It should be noted that the signal relating to the end of the opening of the big winning opening is, for example, a signal that turns off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 .

Next, the information in the big winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings to the big winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1135). . Then, the information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit of the number of rounds is cleared. Clear (step A1137). Then, the information in the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening is cleared (step A1138), and the big winning end transition setting process is finished.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, details of the jackpot ending process (step A14) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of jackpot end processing of the first embodiment.

In this jackpot end processing, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201). When it is not time saving operation data (step A1201; N), big hit end setting processing 1 (step A1202) is performed, and when it is time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 (step A1203) is performed. .

Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is acquired (step A1205).

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (step A1206). Furthermore, the production remaining rotation number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the production remaining rotation number area (step A1207), and the next mode of the production mode set after the special game state is completed. The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the command area for power failure restoration (step A1210), and effect command setting processing (step A1211) is performed.

In addition, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which the information of the production mode is included in either "with high probability/time saving" or "high probability/no time saving". In the case of the first embodiment, when the jackpot ends, it will always be in a variable state (so-called ST state). Mode B", "high probability, time saving, production mode C", "high probability, no time saving, production mode A", which are not used in this process, but also "low probability, no time saving, production mode A ”, “low probability, no time saving, production mode B”, and “low probability, no time saving, production mode C”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and effect command setting processing (step A1213) is performed.
Next, prepare a high probability variation count command corresponding to the high probability variation count (step A1214), perform the effect command setting process (step A1215), and determine whether or not a time saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1216).

When the time-saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the end of the big hit ends.
Also, if the time saving state does not occur after the end of the big hit (step A1216; N), prepare a left-handed instruction notification command (step A1217), perform the production command setting process (step A1218), and then move to the special figure normal process Setting processing 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to no time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal related to no time saving state is, for example, a signal that turns off the jackpot 2 signal.

Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and no time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the high probability state and no time saving state is, for example, a signal to turn on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time It includes a signal to turn off the shortened state signal, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, save the number without time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1223), save the general figure low probability flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1224), to the special figure game mode flag area To save the special figure high probability & no time saving flag (step A1225). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A1226), and the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227). It should be noted that the signal relating to the instruction to hit left is, for example, a signal that turns off firing position designation signal 1 .

Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is finished.
[Jackpot end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal regarding the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal regarding the start of the time saving state is, for example, a signal that turns on the jackpot 2 signal. Since the signal regarding the start of the time-saving state is output from the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area.

Next, the signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). Signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are, for example, a signal to turn on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal , a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, save the number with a time saving state in the game state display number area (step A1233), save the general figure high probability flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and save it in the special figure game mode flag area There is a special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability fluctuation count area (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set during the big win, the right-handed hitting is not set in the big win end setting process 2.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-described jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2, first, "0" which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1242).

After that, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signals relating to the end of the jackpot include, for example, a signal to turn off the jackpot 1 signal, a signal to turn off the jackpot 3 signal, and a signal to turn off the jackpot 4 signal.

Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Signals relating to the end of the jackpot are a signal to turn off the conditional device operating signal, a signal to turn off the character continuous operating device operating signal, a signal to turn off the special pattern 1 hit signal, and a special pattern 2 hit signal. Contains a signal to turn off the signal.

Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the presentation mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, clear the information in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1248), save the fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2 exit.

[Processing during small win fanfare]
Next, the details of the process during small winning fanfare (step A15) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing during the small winning fanfare of the first embodiment.

In the small-hit fanfare mid-process, a small-hit mid-process transition setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small-hit fanfare mid-process is completed.
[Small hit middle process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process shift setting process (step A1301) during the small hit in the process during the small hit fanfare described above will be described with reference to FIG. Drawing 63 is a figure showing the flow chart of processing shift setting processing during a small hit of a 1st embodiment.

In the small hit middle process transition setting process, first, "8", which is the process number related to the small hit middle process, is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1312 ).

Then, the small hit opening time (for example, 0.2s) is set in the special game processing timer area (step A1313), and the signal regarding the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). The signal regarding the start of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal that turns on the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

Then, save the ON data of the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and save the information of the big winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings to the big winning opening. Clear (step A1316).

Then, the small hit operation initial value (for example, "0") is saved in the small hit middle control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hit middle process transition setting process is terminated.
[Small hit middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit middle process (step A16) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. Drawing 64 is a figure showing a flow chart of processing during a small hit of a 1st embodiment.

In the small hit middle processing, first, the small hit middle control pointer is loaded from the small hit middle control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the loaded small hit middle control pointer is the small hit operation end value (for example, "6"). It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied (step A1402).

When the value of the loaded small hit control pointer is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the value of the small hit medium control pointer in the small hit medium control pointer area is updated by "+1" (step A1403 ), the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the process during the small hit ends. If the value of the loaded small hit control pointer is greater than or equal to the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is special. It is determined whether or not the probability is high (step A1406). In addition, determination in step A1406 makes a probability state into determination object, and does not make working hours reduction state into determination object.

When the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), it moves to the processing of step A1409 and performs the subsequent processing. If the loaded flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), prepare a command for the small hit end screen (step A1407), and perform effect command setting processing (step A1408). Then, a small hit remaining ball processing shift setting process (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle process is terminated.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the small-hit operation shift setting process (step A1404) in the above-described small-hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a small hit operation transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the small hit operation transition setting process, first, the value of the control pointer during the small hit loaded at step A1401 is determined (step A1411). If the value of the control pointer during the small hit loaded in step A1401 is "0", "2", "4" (step A1411; pointer = 0, 2, 4), the value of the control pointer during the small hit The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the OFF data of the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small winning operation transition setting process is terminated.

If the value of the control pointer during the small hit loaded in step A1401 is "1", "3", "5" (step A1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the value of the control pointer during the small hit The opening time (200 ms) of the corresponding big winning opening is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1414). Then, the ON data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small winning operation transition setting process is terminated.

Here, the small hit operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the small hit operation of the first embodiment. The numbers inside the squares in the drawing indicate the values of the control pointers.

The small winning operation is a small winning fanfare time (300 ms), a large winning opening opening time (200 ms), a waiting time (1500 ms), a large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and a waiting time. time (1500 ms), subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), subsequent waiting time (1500 ms), subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), subsequent remaining ball processing time (1900 ms), It is a series of operations of a total of 7600ms consisting of a small hit ending time (100ms).

In the case of a small winning operation, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the first time the big winning opening is opened, and the value of the control pointer changes from "0" to "5". The value of the control pointer becomes "6". In this way, in the case of the small winning operation, the small winning remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the special variable winning device 38 is performed four times. In the small hit operation, by setting the small hit ending time after the remaining ball processing time, the apparent ending time is 2000 ms, which is obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time of 1900 ms to the small winning ending time of 100 ms for control.

During the small winning fanfare time, the waiting time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small winning ending time, the special variable winning device 38 is closed by the OFF control of the big winning opening solenoid 38b. Also, during the large winning opening opening time, the special variable winning device 38 is opened by ON control of the large winning opening solenoid 38b.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small-hit remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A1409) in the above-described small-hit middle processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flow chart of a small hit remaining ball process transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, "9", which is the processing number related to the small hit remaining ball processing, is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area ( Step A1422).

Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1423), and the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is turned off in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the special game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small hit remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing, a small hit end processing shift setting process (step A1501) is performed, and the small hitting remaining ball processing ends.
[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the small-hit end processing shift setting process (step A1501) in the above-described small-hit remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flow chart of a small hit end process transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end processing transition setting processing, first, "10", which is the processing number related to the small hit end processing, is set as the processing number (step A1511), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1512 ).

Then, the small winning ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1513), and the signal regarding the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). In addition, the signal regarding the end of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal that turns off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 .

Then, clear the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening (step A1515), clear the information in the small winning medium control pointer area to zero (step A1516), and perform small winning end transition setting processing. exit.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a flow chart of small hit end processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end process, first, the flag related to the probability state is loaded from the special game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1602). If the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1602; Y), it moves to the processing of step A1619 and performs the subsequent processing.

If the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop pattern) The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number is obtained and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the effect remaining rotation speed is obtained and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1606), and the next mode transition information is obtained. Save in the next mode transition information area (step A1607).

Then, prepare the probability information command corresponding to the production mode number obtained in step A1606 (step A1608), determine whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609) .

If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619 and the subsequent processes are performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), and the effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.

Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed. In addition, a high probability variation count command corresponding to the high probability variation count is prepared (step A1614), effect command setting processing (step A1615) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A1616).

When the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. When the new production mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and production command setting processing (step A1618) is performed.

Then, load the flag related to the time saving state from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619), and determine whether the flag loaded in step A1619 is during the special figure time saving (step A1620). When the flag loaded at step A1619 is during special figure time saving (step A1620; Y), special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and small hit end processing is terminated.

If the flag loaded in step A1619 is not in the special figure time saving (step A1620; N), the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). It should be noted that the signal relating to the instruction to hit left is, for example, a signal that turns off firing position designation signal 1 .

Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, save the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), perform special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623), End the winning end process.

[Special figure normal process transition setting process 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) in the small hit end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3, first, "0" which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1632).

Then, the signal regarding the end of the small win is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal regarding the end of the small win is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal regarding the end of the small win is, for example, a signal that turns off the big win 1 signal. Further, the signal relating to the end of the small win is, for example, a signal that turns off the one special symbol small win signal.

Then, the information in the fluctuating design determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, clear the information in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1637), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and perform the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 finish.

[Production command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in the subroutine of the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flow chart of effect command setting processing according to the first embodiment.

In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), the command data (MODE) is written in the performance serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

As a result, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100 . In the case of this flowchart, the commands are transmitted in a two-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like the production commands, but they may be transmitted in a more byte configuration. In those cases, the flow chart should correspond to the multi-byte configuration.

Then, the status of the performance serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether or not the performance serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), the command data (ACTION) is written in the performance serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the performance command setting process is terminated.

By writing the command data (ACTION) in the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. will be

Thus, an effect command (MODE) and an effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The effect control device 300 receives these commands and controls the effect on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Symbol variation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the special game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of symbol variation control processing of the first embodiment.

In the symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the target variation control flag is set and the symbol is varying (step A1801). .

If it is in fluctuation (step A1802; Y), the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the flashing control timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the target pattern is updated by "-1" (step A1804), and it is determined whether or not the flashing control timer is "0" (step A1805).

If the flashing control timer is "0" (step A1805; Y), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target pattern and state is acquired (step A1806), and the flashing control timer initial value is set to the target pattern. Save in the flashing control timer area (step A1807). The flashing control timer initial value will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the variable pattern number of the target pattern is updated by "+1" (step A1808), and the process proceeds to step A1809. If the flashing control timer is not "0" (step A1805; N), the process proceeds to step A1809.

Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the variable pattern number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1809), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. do.

At step A1802, if it is not fluctuating (step A1802; N), the symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the target symbol is obtained (step A1810). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1811), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. do.

In addition, on the variation control table prepared in the special game process, the information of the lower address of the variation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stop) and the address of the display table 1 (for variation) is defined. there is

[Flashing control timer initial value table]
Next, the details of the flashing control timer initial value (step A1806) acquired in the symbol variation control process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is an example of the flashing control timer initial value table of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows.

Flashing control timer initial value is set for each of the target pattern (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) and its state (state 1, state 2).
Flashing control timer initial value is 80 ms when special figure 1 is state 1, and 60 ms when special figure 1 is state 2. In addition, the flashing control timer initial value is 80 ms when Special Figure 2 is in state 1, and is 60 ms when Special Figure 2 is in state 2. In addition, the blinking control timer initial value is 160 ms when the normal map is in state 1, and is 120 ms when the normal map is in state 2.

Note that the blink control timer initial value is smaller in state 2 than in state 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The flashing control timer initial value may be larger in state 2 than in state 1 . For example, the flashing control timer initial value is 60 ms when Special Figure 1 is in state 1, 80 ms when Special Figure 1 is in state 2, and 60 ms when Special Figure 2 is in state 1. , It may be 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in state 2, 120 ms when the general figure is in state 1, and 160 ms when the general figure is in state 2.

The state 2 is a game state more advantageous to the player than the state 1, and a specific game state can be set for each gaming machine. For example, the gaming machine of the first embodiment corresponds to state 1 when special figure 1 or special figure 2 is not in the probability fluctuation state, and when special figure 1 or special figure 2 is in the probability fluctuation state, it is in state 2 Equivalent to.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can play the game of the gaming machine 10 with the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55 in addition to the state display unit 57 in the collective display device 50. Status can be displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can display the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 with a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal figure symbol display unit 55 instead of the state display unit 57 in the collective display device 50. can also be displayed. For example, the gaming machine 10 performs the first state display in the first period in the state display section 57, performs the second state display in the state display section 57 in the subsequent second period, and displays the special figure 1 symbol. The first state display can be performed by the part 53, the special figure 2 symbol display part 54, and the normal figure symbol display part 55. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 notifies the game state transition (trigger notification) in the state display unit 57 when the game state transitions from the normal state to the probability variation state or the like. In addition, the game machine 10 is in the game state in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55 when the game state such as the normal state or the probability fluctuation state is the steady state. is in a steady state (regular notification). In addition, the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily need to notify the game state with the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53, the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54, and the normal figure symbol display portion 55. The game machine 10 may notify the game state by one or two of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general figure symbol display unit 55. In addition, the game machine 10 may notify a more complicated game state by combining the display modes of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53, the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54, and the general figure symbol display portion 55. . Furthermore, the game machine 10 notifies a more complicated game state by combining the display modes of the state display portion 57, the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53, the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54, and the normal symbol display portion 55. may be Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can notify the progress of the game that is easy for the player to understand.

[Distribution process]
Next, the details of the sorting process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the fluctuation pattern setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of distribution processing according to the first embodiment.

In the sorting process, the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, and the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, or selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3 is.

In the sorting process, first, the data at the top of the prepared second half fluctuation group table (selection table), second half fluctuation selection table (selection table), and first half fluctuation selection table (selection table) is a no-sort code (that is, "0"). ) (step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the leading data is a code without sorting (step A1902). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, second half fluctuation pattern, and first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not require a sorting value "0", that is, a code for no sorting is specified at the head.

Then, if the leading data of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is a code without sorting (step A1902; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result ( Step A1907), the sorting process ends. On the other hand, if the top data of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without sorting (step A1902; N), the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table First, one prescribed distribution value is obtained (step A1903).

Subsequently, the distribution value obtained in step A1903 from the random values (values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps A473, A478, and A484 of the fluctuation pattern setting process After calculating a new random number value by subtraction (step A1904), it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step A1905; N), the address of the next sorting value is updated (step A1906), and the process returns to step A1903.

That is, in step A1903, after acquiring the sorting value specified next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table, in step A1905, the determined random value is used as a new random value. The distribution value is subtracted, and a new random number is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). The above processing is performed until it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y). As a result, at least one of the second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern, and the first half fluctuation pattern specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table, or the second half fluctuation selection table or the second half Select a variable number or a first half variable number. If it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y), the data address corresponding to the sorting result is updated (step A1907), and the sorting process ends. do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (step A475) in the variation pattern setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of 2-byte allocation processing according to the first embodiment.

The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 76, in the 2-byte distribution process, first, whether the leading data of the second half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, "0") is checked (step A2001), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the leading data is a code without sorting (step A2002). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, but the second half that defines only the second half fluctuation pattern group in which the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" Since there is no need for sorting in the variation group table (for example, some variation group tables when the result is lost), the sorting value "0", that is, the code for no sorting is specified at the top. .

If the data at the top of the second half variation group table is a code without sorting (step A2002; Y), the data address corresponding to the sorting result is updated (step A2007), and the 2-byte sorting process ends. do. On the other hand, if the top data in the second half fluctuation group table is not a code without sorting (step A2002; N), one sorting value first specified in the second half fluctuation group table is acquired (step A2003).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the sorting value obtained in step A2003 from the random value (value of variation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A473 of the variation pattern setting process (step A2004). , whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step A2005; N), the address of the next sorting value is updated (step A2006), and the process returns to step A2003. That is, in step A2003, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table, in step A2005, the determined random value is used as a new random value, and the distribution value is subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005).

The above processing is performed until it is determined in step A2005 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y). As a result, any one second half variation selection table is selected from at least one second half variation selection table defined in the second half variation group table. Then, if it is determined in step A2005 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y), the data address corresponding to the sorting result is updated (step A2007), and 2-byte sorting processing is performed. exit.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S130) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the general-purpose game process of the first embodiment. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

In this normal game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a normal electric winning prize switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring an input from the start port 2 switch 37a. do Next, if the general pattern game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already timed up, the processing corresponding to the normal game processing number is branched. Perform processing (step B5) to set the general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referenced in the register, and perform processing (step B6) to acquire the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number using the table. . Then, a subroutine call (step B7) is performed by the game process number.

At step B7, if the game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the normal pattern variation display game is monitored, the start of variation of the normal pattern variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the processing during normal pattern variation are performed. Normal figure normal processing (step B8) for setting necessary information etc. is performed. In step B7, if the game processing number is "1", a normal pattern change process (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the normal pattern display process.

Further, in step B7, if the game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal electric power opening time is set according to whether or not the time saving state is in effect. A general pattern display process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the process during the drawing hit is performed. Further, in step B7, if the game processing number is "3", the normal game winning process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the game processing number is "4", a normal electric remaining ball process (step B12) is performed to set information necessary for performing a normal game winning end process. Also, in step B7, if the game processing number is "5", a normal game per end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the normal game process (step B8) is performed.

After that, prepare a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device (step B14), and design fluctuation control processing related to the control of the normal pattern fluctuation by the general pattern display device (step B15) is performed, and the general-purpose game processing ends. On the other hand, at step B4, if the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, if it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described normal game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of gate switch monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is for hitting to the right (step B102). Here, the right-handed gaming state is during a big hit, during a small hit, or during a special time reduction (during general electric support). If the game state is to hit to the right (step B102; Y), the process proceeds to step B105. If it is not a game state to hit right (step B102; N), prepare a left hitting instruction command (step B103), perform production command setting processing (step B104), acquire the normal pattern reservation number and obtain the normal pattern reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

If the number of reserved general patterns is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general patterns is updated by "+1" (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal patterns after the update. Calculate (step B107). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the winning design random number is extracted and saved in the winning design random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

Also, if it is determined that there is no input to the gate switch 34a at step B101 (step B101; N), or if it is determined that the number of normal pattern reservations is not less than the upper limit at step B105 (step B105; N) , the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[General electric winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the normal electric winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above normal game process will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a flow chart of general electric winning switch monitoring processing of the first embodiment. In this normal electrical winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, whether or not the normal variable winning prize device 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations when the normal pattern variation display game is in a winning state. is determined (step B111). Then, when the normal game is in progress (step B111; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112), and it is determined that there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y). If determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by "+1" (step B113).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the general electric counter after updating has reached the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B114), and if the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y) If it is determined, based on the count number of the general electricity counter reaching the upper limit, as a process for closing the general electricity, save the value (for example, "4") of hitting operation end in the control pointer area during the general pattern hit ( Step B115), the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared to zero (step B116), and the general-purpose electric winning switch monitoring processing is terminated. In other words, if there is a general electric winning prize of more than the upper limit value during the normal state, save the value of the end of the hit in the normal state during the processing control pointer area at that time, and the normal state is in the middle let it finish.

Also, if it is determined in step B111 that the normal game is not in progress (step B111; N), if it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112; N) or step B114. If it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B114; N), this general electric prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (step B8) in the above-described general-purpose game processing will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the normal pattern normal processing of the first embodiment. In this general pattern normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B121), and if the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B121; Y), The figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B141) is performed, and the normal figure normal process ends. Also, when the normal pattern reservation number is not "0" (step B121; N), the random number is loaded from the winning random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and the winning pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) (step B122) , the winning random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) and the winning design random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) are cleared to zero (step B123).

Next, it is determined whether the normal pattern high probability that the probability of winning results in the normal pattern variation display game is higher than usual, that is, whether it is a time saving state (step B124). If not in the normal pattern high probability (step B124; N), set the low probability lower limit judgment value (step B125), if in the normal pattern high probability (step B124; Y), the high probability lower limit decision value Set (step B126). Note that the low-probability upper limit judgment value and the high-probability upper limit judgment value are a common value (for example, "251"). In addition, the low-probability lower limit judgment value and the high-probability lower-limit judgment value are different values (for example, the low-probability lower-limit judgment value is “251” and the high-probability lower-limit judgment value is “1”). By comparison, the high probability lower limit judgment value is a small value. As a result, the hit probability is greater at high probability than at low probability, for example, 0/251 at low probability and 250/251 at high probability.

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (step B127). (step B128). In step B127, if the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (step B127; Y) or in steps B127 and B128, if the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step B127; N, step B128; Y), In the case of a loss, save the loss information in the winning flag area (step B129), set the losing stop pattern number (step B130), and save the losing pattern information in the normal pattern stop pattern information area (step B131). Also, in steps B127 and B128, if the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value and equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, that is, in the case of a hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), the win information is saved in the hit flag area ( Step B132), a winning stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded winning pattern random number is set (step B133), and stop design information corresponding to the stop design number is saved in the general pattern stop design information area (step B134). In addition, in the first embodiment, there are three types of winning symbols.

Next, the stop design number is saved in the normal design stop design area (step B135), and the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). After that, shift the random number storage area per general pattern (step B137), clear the empty area after the shift to zero (step B138), and update the general pattern reservation number by "-1" (step B139). That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the order of the normal pattern reservation numbers "2" to "4" that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number "1" is incremented one by one. By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the general pattern reservation number 4 in the general pattern per random number storage area is cleared, and the general pattern reservation number is decremented by "1".

Then, the process shift setting process (step B140) during normal pattern fluctuation is performed, and this normal pattern normal process is terminated.
[General figure normal process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 1 (step B141) in the normal normal pattern process described above will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a flow chart of normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment. In this general pattern normal processing transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as a processing number for transitioning to general pattern normal processing (step B151), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area (step B151). B152). After that, the during fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the normal diagram normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the processing shift setting process (step B140) during normal pattern fluctuation in the normal pattern normal processing described above will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process shift setting process during normal figure fluctuation in the first embodiment. In this normal pattern fluctuation process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the processing number for transitioning to the normal pattern fluctuation process (step B161), and the processing number is saved in the normal pattern game processing number area ( Step B162), the general pattern fluctuation time (common to low probability and high probability (for example, 500 ms)) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B163). Thereafter, a signal relating to the start of the normal pattern variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a signal for turning on the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation.

Next, a variable flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is in the process of being changed is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, save the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the timer for the flashing period of the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern flashing control timer area (step B166), and perform the normal pattern fluctuation process transition setting process. finish.

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the processing during normal pattern fluctuation (step B9) in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing during normal pattern fluctuation in the first embodiment. In this normal pattern fluctuation process, a normal pattern display process transition setting process (step B171) is performed, and the normal pattern fluctuation process is terminated.

[Processing setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process shift setting process (step B171) during normal diagram display in the above normal diagram fluctuation process will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the process transition setting process during normal diagram display according to the first embodiment. In this process transition setting process during normal map display, first, the process number is set to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the process during normal map display (step B181), and the process number is set in the normal game process number area. Save (step B182). After that, the general pattern display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B183). Furthermore, the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the normal pattern is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). In addition, the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the normal pattern is a signal that turns off the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation.

Next, a stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (step B185), and the process transition setting process during normal pattern display is completed.
[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (step B10) in the above-described general-purpose map game processing will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a flow chart of processing during normal map display according to the first embodiment. In this general pattern display process, first, the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process is loaded (step B191), and the information in the RWM hit flag area is cleared (step B192 ), it is determined whether or not the loaded winning flag is winning information (step B193).

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B193; N), the normal pattern normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step B198) for shifting to the normal pattern normal processing is performed, and the normal pattern displaying process is terminated. This normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the hit flag is the hit information (step B193; Y), a process setting table during the hit is set (step B194).

Then, the hit start pointer value (control pointer "0", "2", "4") corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information is acquired, and saved in the normal pattern per middle control pointer area (step B195), The general electric open time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the general pattern stop symbol information is obtained and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B196). As a result, the mode of opening the normal variable prize winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and it is possible to open it four times, for example. After that, per normal pattern middle processing shift setting processing (step B197) is performed, and processing during normal pattern display is completed.

[Regular figure per middle process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B197) during the normal figure hit in the process during the normal figure display described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing during normal per figure of the first embodiment. In this general pattern per middle process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as a processing number for transitioning to the general pattern per middle process (step B201), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area. (Step B202). Thereafter, a signal relating to the start of winning in the normal pattern variation display game (a signal relating to winning in the normal pattern variation display game) and a signal relating to the start of normal electric operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). It should be noted that the signal relating to the start of winning in the normal pattern variation display game is a signal that turns on the normal symbol 1 winning signal, and the signal relating to the normal operation start is a signal that turns on the signal during normal electric accessory 1 operation. is.

Next, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common solenoid, ON data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B204).
Furthermore, the information in the electric count area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B205), and the electric fraud to store the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 during the electric power fraud monitoring period The information in the winning number area is cleared (step B206). Then, the flag that defines the non-fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the process transition setting process for the normal per figure is completed.

[Medium processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the processing (step B11) during the normal pattern hit in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing during normal per pattern according to the first embodiment. In this general pattern per middle process, first, the normal pattern per middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the normal pattern per middle control pointer is the value of the normal pattern per middle control pointer upper limit value area. It is determined whether or not (the value of the end of the hit) has been reached (step B212).

Then, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (step B212; N), the control pointer during the normal per pattern is updated by "+1" (step B213). , Normal electric operation transition setting processing (step B214) is performed, and the processing during the normal pattern hit ends. In addition, when the value of the control pointer in the normal pattern hit reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area in the normal pattern hit (the value of the end of the hit) (step B212; Y), step B213 is passed and the normal electric operation transition setting The process (step B214) is performed, and the process during the general pattern is terminated.

[General electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the general electric operation transition setting process (step B214) in the above-described general pattern per middle process will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal electric operation transition setting processing according to the first embodiment. This general electric operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer. In this general electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B221).

If the value of the control pointer is either "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B222. That is, in order to control the closing of the normal variable winning device 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after blocking of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B222), In order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the OFF data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B223), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

If the value of the control pointer is either "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B224. That is, in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 opening time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B224), the on-data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B225), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B226. That is, in order to end the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 and perform the normal electric remaining ball process (step B12), "4" is set as the process number (step B226). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (step B227), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B228). After that, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the OFF data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B229), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Next, normal electric operation in the normal variable winning device 37 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a normal electric operation timing chart of the normal variable winning device of the first embodiment. The numbers inside the squares in the drawing indicate the values of the control pointers.

The general electric operation in the case of winning pattern 1 in the normal variable winning device 37 is a total of 1200 ms consisting of the general pattern display time (600 ms), the general electric open time (500 ms), and the remaining ball processing time (600 ms). is a series of actions. In the case of the winning symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes "4" after the normal electric open time elapses, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the normal variable winning device 37 is opened once.

In addition, the normal electric operation in the case of the winning pattern 2 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is the normal symbol display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric open time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent It is a series of operations for a total of 4800 ms, consisting of the normal electric release time (1700 ms) and the subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the winning pattern 2, the value of the control pointer becomes "2" after the lapse of the first electric power opening time, and the control pointer values are "2" and "3". The value of the pointer becomes "4". In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 2, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the normal variable winning device 37 has been opened twice.

In addition, the normal electric operation in the case of the winning pattern 3 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is the normal symbol display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric open time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent It is a series of operations for a total of 6700 ms, consisting of a general electric open time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), a general electric open time (1700 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of winning pattern 3, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the lapse of the first electric power open time, and the value of the control pointer corresponds to "0", "1", "2", and "3". After each process, the value of the control pointer becomes "4". In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 3, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the normal variable winning device 37 has been opened three times.

In addition, between the normal map display time, the wait time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is closed by the OFF control of the normal electric solenoid 37c. Further, during the general electric open time, the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is opened by ON control of the general electric solenoid 37c.

[Public electric residual bulb treatment]
Next, the general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above general electric game processing will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal electric residual bulb processing according to the first embodiment. In this normal electric remaining ball processing, a normal electric remaining ball per end processing transition setting process (step B231) is performed, and the normal electric remaining ball processing ends.

[Regular figure per end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the end processing transition setting processing (step B231) per normal pattern in the above-described normal electric remaining ball processing will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of per-normal figure per end process transition setting process of the first embodiment. In this general pattern per end processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number "5" related to the general pattern per end processing is set (step B241), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area (step B242 ).

Thereafter, the normal game ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B243), and the signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B244). In addition, the signal regarding the end of the operation of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is a signal that turns off the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal.

Next, the information in the general electrical count area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value of the control pointer area in the per normal pattern is cleared (step B246), and the normal per pattern end processing transition setting process is terminated.

[End processing per normal pattern]
Next, the end processing (step B13) per normal pattern in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of per-universal pattern end processing of the first embodiment. In this general pattern per end process, the general pattern per normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) is performed, and the general pattern per end process is terminated.

[General figure normal process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) in the normal pattern per end process described above will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a flow chart of normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment. In this general pattern normal processing transition setting process 2, first, the processing number "0" relating to general pattern normal processing is set (step B261), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area (step B262). .

Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of winning in the normal pattern variation game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). It should be noted that the signal relating to the end of the normal pattern variation game is a signal that turns off the signal during normal symbol 1 variation.

After that, the flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B264), and the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 2 is completed. .

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of segment LED editing processing according to the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, round display unit 51 provided in the collective display device 50, special figure 1 reservation display unit 52, normal figure reservation display unit 56, setting related to driving of LEDs constituting the state display unit 57, etc. do

In the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by adding "1" (step C11). The blink control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, determine the output on timing of the general pattern hold display (step C12), if it is the output on timing (step C12; Y), set the general pattern hold number display table 1 (step C13), output on timing If not (step C12; N), set the normal pattern pending number display table 2 (step C14). In addition, the determination of the output ON timing of the normal map hold display can be performed by referring to the specific bit of the timer. For example, by referring to the 5th bit of the timer that is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, a blink period of 128 ms can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved normal patterns is acquired from the set display table 1 of reserved normal patterns or the display table 2 of reserved normal patterns, and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing display data of LED_00 to LED_31.

For example, the general pattern reservation number display table 1 and the general pattern reservation number display table 2 have the same value for the general pattern reservation number "0" to "2", and the values for the general pattern reservation number "3" and "4" are different. is. As a result, in the general figure reservation display unit 56, the LED corresponding to the general figure reservation number "0" is turned off, the LED corresponding to the general figure reservation number "1", "2" is lit, and the general figure reservation number "3" , "4" realizes blinking of the corresponding LED.

Next, the output on timing of the special figure 1 pending display is determined (step C16), and if it is the output on timing (step C16; Y), the special figure 1 pending number display table 1 is set (step C17), output If it is not on-timing (step C16; N), set the special figure 1 pending number display table 2 (step C18). It should be noted that the determination of the output-on timing of the special figure 1 pending display can also be the same as the determination of the output-on timing of the normal figure pending display. At this time, for example, by differentiating the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by 1 every 4 ms from the normal diagram reservation display, a blinking cycle different from the normal diagram reservation display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is acquired from the set special figure 1 reservation number display table 1 or the special figure 1 reservation number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C19). It should be noted that the special figure 1 reservation display unit 52 is also similar to the general figure reservation display unit 56 to achieve the lighting mode of the LED.

Next, determine the output on timing of the special figure 2 pending display (step C20), if it is the output on timing (step C20; Y) set the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 (step C21), output If it is not on-timing (step C20; N), set the special figure 2 pending number display table 2 (step C22). It should be noted that the determination of the output-on timing of the special figure 2 pending display can also be the same as the determination of the output-on timing of the general figure pending display. At this time, for example, by differentiating the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by 1 every 4 ms from the normal diagram reservation display, a blinking cycle different from the normal diagram reservation display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired from the set special figure 2 reservation number display table 1 or the special figure 2 reservation number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C23). It should be noted that, also for the special figure 2 reservation display unit 58, in the same manner as the general figure reservation display unit 56 to achieve the lighting mode of the LED.

Further, a round display LED display table that defines the display mode of the round display unit 51 is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C25). .

Next, the game state display table 1 is set (step C26), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 1 is obtained, and saved in the segment area (step C27).
In addition, the game state display table 1 indicates whether the game state of the special figure game is during time saving (under general electric support), in other words, whether it is one of the game states advantageous to the player. A display mode for notification by the display unit 57 is defined. For example, when the LED_29 of the state display unit 57 is turned off, "normal" is notified, and when the LED_29 is lit, "special figure time saving (during general electricity support)" is notified.

After that, the game state display table 2 is set (step C28), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process is finished.

The game state display table 2 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is a right-handed game state, in other words, whether or not it is another game state advantageous to the player. Defines the display mode for notification. For example, when the LED_30 of the state display section 57 is turned off, "normal hitting (left hitting)" is reported, and when the LED_30 is lit, "right hitting" is reported. It should be noted that the period for announcing "right-handed" includes periods corresponding to game states such as during a big win, during a small win, and during general electric support.

As a result, the segment LED editing process can notify the player of the progress of the game in the set display mode. Therefore, the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 reservation display unit 52, the special figure 2 reservation display unit 58, the general figure reservation display unit 56, and the state display unit, which are the setting targets of the display mode by the segment LED editing process 57 has a function as a game progress notification unit.

Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing and board radio fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud will be described. For a gaming machine that provides a predetermined game value to a player according to the result of a game, there are cases where fraudulent acts to illegally obtain a game value are performed. Among such fraudulent acts, gaming machines having a mechanism for detecting fraudulent acts using magnets have been conventionally known. There are various types of fraudulent acts, and detection methods and conditions corresponding to each type are required. However, it was not possible to accurately detect the occurrence of abnormal conditions.

In particular, erroneously judging that an abnormal state has occurred even though no abnormal state leading to fraudulent behavior has occurred, and issuing a notification, etc., will cause distrust of the player and may be a factor to avoid playing on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is important to avoid erroneous detection of such an abnormal state.

Therefore, the game machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector. For the purpose of preventing erroneous detection of an abnormal state, for example, the following magnet fraud monitoring processing and board radio fraud monitoring processing are performed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
First, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of magnet fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. In the magnet tampering monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, which functions as a magnetism detector for detecting abnormal magnetism, and the start and end of tampering notification are set. Since the magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector that detects the approach of a magnet, the magnetic sensor can be rephrased as a magnet sensor.

In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), it is determined whether the magnetic sensor is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected. It is determined whether or not (step C31). If the magnetic sensor is on (step C31; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by adding "1" (step C32). ), it is determined whether or not the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out (step C33).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step C33; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time (for example, 32 ms), abnormality is determined. If an abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the magnet fraud alert timer initial value (eg, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step C35). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C36), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C37), and whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area is determined. Determine (step C43).

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as abnormal state detection control means for detecting an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor continuously detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period.

On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor is not on (step C31; N), that is, if no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification that specifies the magnet fraud notification time is issued. If the timer is not "0", it is updated by subtracting "1" from the magnet fraud notification timer (step C39). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step C33; N), the process proceeds to step C39.

If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C40; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the period of the fraud notification has expired, or when If no tampering information has been issued since then, a command for ending magnet tampering notification is prepared (step C41). Furthermore, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C42), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C43).

If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C44), effect command setting processing is performed (step C45), and magnet fraud monitoring processing is terminated. do.

[Processing for monitoring radio wave fraud]
Next, the details of the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process (step S133) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a flow chart of radio wave unauthorized monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. In the board radio fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 serving as a radio wave detector for detecting abnormal radio waves, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

In the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I/F 121, the board radio wave sensor is turned on, That is, it is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C51). If the board radio wave sensor is ON (step C51; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave tampering alarm timer (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave tampering alarm area (step C52).

Then, a command for notifying radio wave fraud is prepared (step C53), and a radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step C54). It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, in the case of radio fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the board radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the board radio wave sensor detects an abnormal radio wave only once.

On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor is not ON (step C51; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave tampering alarm timer that defines the radio wave tampering notification time is not "0". It is updated by subtracting "1" from the timer (step C55). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave tampering alarm timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio irregularity notification timer is "0" (step C56).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C56; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the radio tampering alarm timer is "0" (step C56; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired and the period of the tampering alarm has expired, or if If no unauthorized information has been issued since then, a command for ending the radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step C57), a radio wave fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a flag of radio wave fraud (step C58), and the prepared radio wave fraud is It is determined whether or not the flag matches the value of the radio wave irregularity flag area (step C59).

Then, if the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step C59; Y), the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area (step C60), effect command setting processing is performed (step C61), and radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

By performing the magnet fraud monitoring process and the board radio fraud monitoring process as described above, it is possible to accurately detect the occurrence of an abnormal state. In other words, game machines are equipped with components that generate magnetism, such as solenoids. It is possible to avoid erroneously detecting an occurrence as an abnormal condition. On the other hand, since the game machine is not equipped with parts that emit radio waves, damage can be minimized by immediately determining that an abnormal radio wave is detected as an abnormal state.

In the first embodiment, the abnormal magnetism is simply detected in the state of detecting magnetism. A state in which magnetism is detected may be regarded as abnormal. In addition, in the first embodiment, abnormal radio waves are simply detected in the state of receiving radio waves. It may be in a state of receiving radio waves of a frequency that does not exist. Further, a state in which a radio wave whose intensity is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value or a radio wave of a specific frequency is detected may be regarded as abnormal. When thresholds are set according to magnetic intensity, radio wave intensity, and frequency, the magnetic sensor 61 or board radio wave sensor 62 may output a signal when the threshold is exceeded, or the controller may set the threshold. You may make it monitor whether it exceeded.

From the above, the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (board radio wave sensor 62) that detects abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector Based on the abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state, the abnormal state detection control means, in the case of the magnetic detector, continuously over a predetermined period of time detected the abnormal magnetism However, in the case of a radio wave detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred only once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 98 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (step S125), winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S128), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) and board radio fraud monitoring process (step S133) Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal, amusement center internal management device, or a test firing test device is created and a process of setting it in an output buffer is performed.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to the error state and security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error state and security state, when a glass frame open error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a body frame open error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door/frame The ON data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame open error and the body frame open error are output as external information and test signals.

On the other hand, if neither the glass frame open error nor the body frame open error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the OFF data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C75), the security signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, if the security signal control timer, which counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like, is updated to "-1" if it is not "0". (step C77). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, if the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, if the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information until the security signal control timer times out.

Magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), board radio fraud is occurring (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), electrical fraud is occurring (step C83; Y), or big win When fraud is occurring (step C84; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the game machine error state signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

On the other hand, if none of magnet fraud, board radio fraud, frame radio fraud, general electrical fraud, or big winning gate fraud has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is tested. Save in the signal output data area (step C87).

Next, in the external information editing process, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal of the starting point. do Next, if the pattern determination count control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the execution count of the special figure variation display game is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C90). In addition, the minimum value of the pattern determination count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the pattern fixing number control timer is "0" (step C91).

If the value of the pattern confirmation count control timer is "0" (step C91; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the pattern confirmation count signal is stored in the external information output data area. Save (step C92) and terminate the external information editing process. Also, if the value of the design determination count control timer is not "0" (step C91; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the design determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C93), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process of the first embodiment. The main prize ball signal editing process is a main prize ball signal generated each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number of payouts, planned number of game media payouts) generated by winning a prize in a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). is output to an external device.

In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the main prize ball signal output count is "0" (step C103).

Then, if the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is not "0" (step C103; N), the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated to "-1" (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is stored. The initial value of the prize ball signal output control timer is saved (step C105). This main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) in the ON state (for example, high level) and the time (for example, 64 ms) for the OFF state (for example, low level) of the main prize ball signal. time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the main prize signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize signal editing process is terminated. Also, if the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step C103; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106). It should be noted that the fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. In addition, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step C106; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

Through the above process, the information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out is transmitted to the outside. After the payout condition based on the winning of the game ball is satisfied, it is faster to generate and transmit the main prize ball signal than to operate the payout device to complete the payout of the game ball. During the period from when the payout condition is satisfied until the game media of the payout number are paid out, information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside.

That is, the game control device 100 is capable of outputting to the outside information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, after the payout condition is satisfied and before the number of game media to be paid out is paid out. form an external output means.

However, if the number of generated prize balls is small and even if it is added to the value of the remaining number of prize balls, it does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 10), information on the planned number of game media to be paid out will be displayed after the actual payout is completed. is sometimes output. By reducing the unit of the number of game media to be paid out corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, "1"), the time from when the payout condition is satisfied to when the number of game media to be paid out is always paid out is reduced. In the meantime, it is also possible to output information about the number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, to the outside.

From the above, a payout device (payout unit) that can pay out game media and a control means (game control) that controls the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition. In a gaming machine comprising a device 100 and a payout control device 200, the control means determines the number of game media to be paid out after the payout condition is established until the game media of the payout number are paid out. It is provided with an external output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting information on the planned number of game media to be paid out to the outside. It should be noted that this configuration can also be applied to a slot machine using game media as medals.

In addition, the external output means (game control device 100) is provided with a storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the expected number of game media to be paid out which has not been output to the outside, and based on the establishment of the payout condition, addition means (game control device 100) for adding a planned game medium payout number corresponding to the established payout condition to a game medium storage area; Based on this, transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game medium payouts to the outside, and subtracting the predetermined number of scheduled game medium payouts transmitted by the transmitting means from the game medium storage area. Subtracting means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of the first embodiment.
For example, the game control device 100 outputs one pulse (main prize ball signal) each time a predetermined unit number (for example, 10) of game media is scheduled to be paid out. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from "OFF" to "ON" when the value of the output control timer is "48", and from "ON" to "OFF" when the value of the output control timer is "16". , and remains "OFF" until the value of the output control timer reaches "0". That is, the output signal of the main prize signal is a pulse signal of 192 ms consisting of an "ON" time of 128 ms and an "OFF" time of 64 ms.

Note that, unlike the game control device 100, the payout control device 200 outputs one pulse (prize ball signal) each time a predetermined unit number (for example, 10) of game media is paid out. As a result, the gaming machine 10 allows the external device to confirm the match between the game medium payout schedule and the game medium payout result, and can deal with illegal payouts.

Also, in the winning during the jackpot period, if the payout of the game media is delayed due to running out of balls or the like, and the game media are paid out after the jackpot ends, the external device will not be able to receive the prize ball signal output by the payout control device 200. It was not possible to determine whether or not the payout was based on winning during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs the main prize ball signal so that an external device (for example, a hall computer) can accurately collect information (determine).

[Starting port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start signal editing process (step C89) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the starting point signal editing process of the first embodiment. The starting port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

In the starting point signal editing process, first, if the starting point signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C111). Note that the minimum value of the starting signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start signal output control timer is "0" (step C112). If the value of the starting signal output control timer is "0" (step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not the starting signal output count is "0" (step C113).

If the starting signal output count is not "0" (step C113; N), the starting signal output count is updated to "-1" (step C114), and the starting signal is output to the starting signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step C115). The starting signal output control timer initial value is the time (eg, 128 ms) in which the starting signal is on (eg, high level) plus the time (eg, 64 ms) during which it is off (eg, low level). For example, 192 ms). After that, ON data for turning on the starting signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the starting signal editing process ends. If the number of times the starting signal is output is "0" (step C113; Y), the OFF data for turning off the starting signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C113; Y). C118), ending the starting point signal editing process.

On the other hand, if the value of the starting signal output control timer is not "0" (step C112; N), it is determined whether or not the starting signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C116). Note that the fact that the starting signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the starting signal output control timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C116; Y), the process proceeds to step C117. If the starting signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step C116; N), the OFF data for turning off the starting signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step C118), the starting point signal editing process is terminated.

Next, control of the production control device 300 will be described. In addition, the special figure controlled by the production control device 300 is a special figure for production displayed on the display device 41, and the special figure in the description of the control processing of the production control device 300 below is the special figure for this production. It means (decorative pattern that is not a special pattern).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the production control device 300 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when power supply to the gaming machine 10 is started.
[Step D11] The controller prohibits interrupts.

[Step D<b>12 ] The controller initializes the CPU 311 .
[Step D<b>13 ] The controller initializes the VDP 312 .
[Step D14] The controller permits an interrupt.

[Step D15] The controller permits generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits the display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The controller sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the srand function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU etc. so that it differs for each gaming machine. You may

[Step D17] The control unit initializes an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, a flag area for effect (storage area used as various flags described later in the control processing of the effect control device 300) ) to save the initial values at power-on.

[Step D18] The controller clears WDT.
[Step D19] The control unit executes effect button input processing. The effect button input process is a process of editing when the effect buttons (the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b) are operated when enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform processing for sensing the input of the effect button within the effect button input process, or may be performed within a short cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control section executes hall/player setting mode processing. The hall/player setting mode process is a process of setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LEDs and the display device 41, and receiving an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LEDs and the display device 41, and the like.

[Step D21] The control unit executes random number update processing. The random number update process is, for example, a process of updating a pseudorandom number at least once in each control cycle of the main process using a rand function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number simply by executing the rand function. A counter that increments by "1" like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as the random number.

[Step D22] The controller executes a received command check process. The received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D22A] The controller executes power saving control processing. The power saving control process performs switching control between a normal control state (non-power saving control state) in which the power consumption of the device subject to power saving control is not suppressed and a power saving control state in which the power consumption of the device subject to power saving control is suppressed. processing.

[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 about the content of drawing on the display device 41 . For example, the control unit sets commands in a table in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The controller determines whether or not it is time to switch frames. If it is time to switch frames, the process proceeds to step D26. If it is time to switch frames, it waits for the time to switch frames. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (eg, 1/30 sec ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (eg, 1/60 sec) of V blank interrupt (also called V sync interrupt). It is the timing that arrives at the target interval. Note that the V blank interrupt occurs each time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. The period of generation of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt occurs twice, the frame is switched, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (for example, 1/30 second≈33.33 ms). However, the frame switching timing is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

By the frame switching timing determination process, subsequent processes (steps D26 to D30 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) are executed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. Note that the time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of processing cycles). If the processing period is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames will be 100 ms. This is the same as that the main board (game control device) manages the time value in units of 4ms of the timer interrupt period.

[Step D26] The controller instructs the VDP 312 to draw the screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table to instruct the VDP 312 to draw the screen.

[Step D27] The controller executes sound control processing. The sound control processing is processing related to volume control of sounds from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The controller executes decoration control processing. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like.
[Step D29] The controller executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body (for example, board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

[Step D30] The control section executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets the launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, the predetermined number of rental balls)). This is a process for correcting the mode of production.

After executing step D30, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter repeats the processing of steps D18 to D30. That is, steps D18 to D30 constitute a loop process (called main loop process in some cases) that is repeatedly executed at the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.

Note that the control unit executes the processing of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the screen effects. A signal for driving control, etc.) is actually output to the port in a short cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there are cases in which signals, etc., are not output by timer interrupts, just by giving instructions through serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, reception command check processing will be described using FIG. Figure 103 is the figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the production control control equipment of 1st execution form. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

In addition, the received command (effect command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the effect command from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300 are sent sequentially. Such data constituting a command is hereinafter referred to as command data or command data.

Processing for receiving commands from the main substrate is performed by "command reception interrupt processing" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission and reception are automatically performed by the hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. It is sufficient to just retrieve it from the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", each time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether there is an error in the loaded command data, the command is processed. Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is incremented by "1" for the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply "storing" means storing and storing in a readable manner in a predetermined storage area for later use in the control process (the same applies hereinafter). Also, the command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is configured by a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311, for example. The capacity of the command buffer should be equal to or greater than the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in the system control period (the processing period described above; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The controller loads the value of the command reception counter as the command reception count. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle at step D43, it stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one period of the processing period described above).

[Step D42] The control section determines whether or not the number of received commands is "0 (zero)". If so, terminate the received command check process. In the present application, "loading" data in the control process as in step D41 means taking out data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The controller decrements the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of received commands.
If A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of commands received, "A=B" immediately after execution of step D41. Then, immediately after the execution of step D43, "A = AB = 0" is a normal movement, but in the aspect of this example, the effect control device 300 command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100 is given the highest priority without disabling the interrupt, there is a possibility that the value of A has increased between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the processing of step D43 is set to "A←0" (that is, the processing of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be shifted. I am doing it. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase during the processing from step D41 to step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A←0".

[Step D44] The control section reads the contents of the receive command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to command area (sometimes called command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO type (first-in first-out type) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, it updates the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, by increasing it by "1", for example, within the range of "0" to "31". Do. Note that the range from "0" to "31" here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] The control section determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of commands received has been completed (that is, whether steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of commands received). The control unit advances to step D47 if copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed, and advances to step D44 if copying has not been completed.

[Step D47] The controller loads (reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data in the command area that has not yet been read, i.e., data to be read next). do.

[Step D48] The control section executes a received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command). The received command analysis processing will be described later using FIG.

[Step D49] The controller updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The controller determines whether or not the analysis of the commands equal to the number of commands received has been completed (that is, whether steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of commands received). The control unit proceeds to step D47 if analysis of the commands equal to the number of commands received has not been completed, and ends the received command check processing if analysis has been completed.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, received command analysis processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a flowchart of received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte in MODE and the lower byte in ACT of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process. In the case of a variation command that commands a special figure variation pattern, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half variation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half variation pattern. It is.

[Step D52] The controller determines whether the MODE value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. If the value of MODE is within the normal range, the control unit proceeds to step D53, and if the value of MODE is not within the normal range, ends the received command analysis process. Note that some MODE values are not defined and are not used, and if such an unused value is determined in step D52, it is determined that it is not within the normal range.

[Step D53] The controller determines whether the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. If the ACT value is within the normal range, the control unit proceeds to step D54, and if the ACT value is not within the normal range, ends the received command analysis process.

Further, determination in step D53 as to whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective ACT value are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D53, the values are separated into the range of the upper and lower limits. It is checked whether the obtained ACT value is within the normal range.

[Step D54] The control section determines whether or not the separated ACT values for the separated MODE values are a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 if the ACT values are a correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process if the combination is not correct. A match check table, for example, can be used to determine whether or not the ACT values are a correct combination. The match check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for MODE values are registered in order from the leading address, and is provided for each MODE value. If there is a separated ACT value in this matching check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the matching check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the ACT values are a correct combination is performed including a missing check to determine whether or not the MODE is a normal combination of ACT values. Although there are multiple valid ACTs for one MODE, their values are not necessarily continuous (that is, there are values that are not discontinuous and values that are missing), so the command is a valid value. Since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is checked one by one whether they match with any of them.

[Step D55] The controller determines whether or not the MODE data is within the range of the variable command. If the MODE value is within the variable command range, the control unit executes the variable command process (details omitted) (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 if the MODE data is not within the variable command range. .

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Also, the variation command (sometimes referred to as variation command or variation pattern command) is a command to command the variation pattern of the special figure, and the range that the data of this variation command can take is the variation command range.

[Step D57] The controller determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes a jackpot command process (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. . The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the jackpot effect, and the range of the jackpot command data is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control section determines whether or not the MODE data is within the range of the symbol-based command. If the value of MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command, the control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 if the data of MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command. . Symbol system command (sometimes referred to as symbol command or decorative special figure command) is a command to command information about the special figure symbol (for example, what to do with the special figure stop symbol etc.), this symbol command The range that can be taken by the data of is the pattern system command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. If the MODE value is within the single-shot command range, the control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) (step D62), and if the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range, proceeds to step D63. . In addition, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command, a command that is established independently is called a single-shot command. Single-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a pattern stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot system command range.

[Step D63] The control section determines whether or not the MODE data is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command. The control unit executes the prefetching pattern system command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the prefetching symbol system command range (step D64), and when the MODE data is not within the prefetching symbol system command range, step Go to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch variation command range. If the MODE data is within the prefetch variation command range, the control unit executes prefetch variation command processing (details omitted) (step D66), and if the MODE data is not within the prefetch variation command range, step Go to D67. In addition, the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are commands for look-ahead production.

[Step D67] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the error-related command range. If the MODE data is within the error-related command range, the control unit executes error-related command processing (details omitted) (step D68), and if the MODE data is not within the error-related command range, the received command analysis processing is performed. exit. The error-related commands are commands for notifying error start and error end.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game that corresponds to a start winning memory that has not been executed by the special figure changing display game (suspension of starting winning memory, or simply referred to as suspension). In order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined degree of reliability whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of variation pattern it will be) when is executed after that, the suspension display of the starting winning memory is performed in a manner different from usual. It is a production such as. Then, the look-ahead system command (look-ahead variation system command and look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to notify in advance the variation pattern and stop design corresponding to the holding of the start winning memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and the game at the time of start winning It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Decoration control process]
Next, decoration control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration control processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The decoration control process is a process executed by the control section in step D28 of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit executes test mode decoration processing. The test mode decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for checking whether a decoration device such as an LED provided in the gaming machine 10 normally lights up with a predetermined decoration pattern. The control unit executes the test mode decoration process when the game machine 10 is started in the test mode, and does not execute the test mode decoration process when the game machine 10 is started in the normal mode.

[Step D72] The control section executes error decoration processing. The control unit executes error decoration processing when the performance control device 300 receives an error-related command from the game control device 100, and does not execute error decoration processing when it does not receive an error-related command. The error decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for informing the player or the employee of the game arcade that an error has occurred.

[Step D73] The control section executes decoration setting processing. The decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to the game state. The decoration setting process will be explained later using FIG.

[Step D74] The control unit executes event decoration setting processing. The event decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to the event when a predetermined event occurs. The predetermined event is, for example, when push button 25 is operated.

[Step D75] The controller executes decoration pattern control data setting processing. The decoration pattern control data setting process is a process of setting control data to be transmitted to each effect device (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18), and sets control data according to the decoration pattern set in steps D71 to D74. do. After executing the decoration pattern control data setting process, the control unit terminates the decoration control process.

[Decoration setting process]
Next, decoration setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration setting processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the decoration control process.

[Step D81] The control section branches the processing according to the game state. If the game state is "power on", the control unit proceeds to step D82; if the game state is "recovery from power failure", proceeds to step D84; if the game state is "waiting for customers", proceeds to step D86; If the game state is "fluctuating", proceed to step D88; if the game state is "stopping symbols", proceed to step D89; if the game state is "fanfare in progress", proceed to step D90; In the case of "during round", the process proceeds to step D91, and in the case of "ending", the process proceeds to step D92.

[Step D82] The controller sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting. Note that the loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decoration pattern.
[Step D83] The control unit sets a power-on decoration pattern from power-on to a playable state (waiting for customers (state)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeats the decoration display corresponding to power-on until it becomes ready to play. After setting the power-on decoration pattern, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D84] The controller sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D85] The control unit sets a power failure recovery decoration pattern from power failure recovery to a playable state (waiting for customers (state)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeats the decoration display corresponding to the restoration of the power failure until the gaming machine 10 becomes ready to play. After setting the power failure restoration decoration pattern, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D86] The controller sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D87] The control section executes a customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process while waiting for customers (state). The control unit sets a decoration pattern corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration in the customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decoration display corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration while waiting for customers. After executing the customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D88] The control unit executes the changing ornament setting process while the game state is "fluctuating", that is, while the fluctuation display game is being executed. In the variable decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the variable display game being executed (for example, when a big hit announcement is included, a rainbow including clockwise and counterclockwise rainbow colors is displayed). color display). As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decoration display corresponding to the effect mode of the variable display game being executed while the variable display game is being executed. After executing the changing decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D89] When the game state is "symbols stopped", that is, when the identified symbols in the variable display game are stopped, the control section executes decoration setting processing during symbol stop. The control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the identification symbol is stopped in the symbol stop decoration setting process. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decorative display indicating that the identification symbols are stopped while the identification symbols are stopped. After executing the decoration setting process during design stop, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D90] The control unit executes decoration setting processing during fanfare when the game state is "in fanfare", that is, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. In the decoration setting process during the fanfare, the control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, rainbow display including clockwise rainbow display and counterclockwise rainbow display) indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit. . As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decorative display indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big win during the fanfare. After executing the decoration setting process during fanfare, the control unit ends the decoration setting process. Note that the gaming machine 10 performs the decoration display with the decoration pattern set in the decoration setting process during the fanfare until the big win state is started.

[Step D91] The control unit executes the during-round decoration setting process when the game state is "in-round", that is, when each round in the jackpot state is being executed. In the in-round decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the round is in progress (for example, rainbow-colored display including clockwise and counter-clockwise rainbow-colored displays). As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decorative display indicating that the round is in progress during the round. After executing the mid-round decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D92] The control section executes the during-ending decoration setting process when the game state is "ending", that is, when the ending process indicating that the jackpot state has ended is being executed. In the ending decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the ending is in progress (for example, rainbow color display including clockwise rainbow color display and counterclockwise rainbow color display). As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decorative display indicating that the ending is in progress while the ending is in progress. After executing the ending decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. First, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the second embodiment. In the following, the description will focus on the differences from the game board 30 of the first embodiment.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 of the game board 3000 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, there is provided a normal pattern start gate 34 that provides a start condition for the normal pattern variation display game. A game ball that has won the normal figure starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 109). In addition, two general prize winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general prize winning opening is arranged in the lower right part of the special variable prize winning device 38 arranged in the lower right part of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The game balls that have entered the general winning hole 35 are detected by the winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 109).

Below the center case 40, there are a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening that gives the starting condition of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). A prize winning device 90 having a second start prize winning port 97 that provides a condition for starting the 2-variation display game) is provided. This prize winning device 90 is provided with a distribution member 92 for alternately distributing the game balls flowing into the upper inlet 91 to the starting prize winning port 36 and the second starting prize winning port 97 inside. The distribution member 92 is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the tilting direction changes depending on the weight of the incoming game ball. The game balls are alternately distributed to the openings 97 . A game ball that has entered the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 109), and a game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 97a (see FIG. 109). be done. In addition, below the prize winning device 90, an out port 30a is provided for collecting game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port.

In addition, on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable prize winning device 37 (second starting prize winning port, starting prize winning area) that gives the starting condition of the second special figure variable display game is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 is equipped with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which the upper end side is turned in a direction in which it falls to the right to open and allow game balls to easily flow in. This movable member 37b is always It maintains a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which it is almost vertical and game balls cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is turned so that it falls to the right by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 109) as a driving device, and the normal fluctuation is performed. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which game balls can easily flow. A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 109). In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and make it more difficult to win prizes in the closed state than in the open state.

A downflow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game balls that do not win the normal variable winning device 37 pass through the downflow path 615 downward. flow down to A guiding portion 616 is provided below the flow-down passage 615 . The upper surface 617 of the guiding portion 616 is formed as an inclined surface that descends to the left.

In addition, the guide section 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information about the special figure variation display game.
This information display device 630 includes a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first special figure variation display game, and a second start memory that is the right to run the second special figure variation display game. a second information display section for displaying the number of Separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41, the decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game is displayed by the fourth symbol. A decoration special figure 2 variation corresponding to a second special figure variation display game by a fourth symbol separately from the third information display part and the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41 A fourth information display section for displaying a display game is provided.

Each of the first information display section and the second information display section is composed of two light emitting members, and each of the third information display section and the fourth information display section is composed of one light emitting member. In the second display device, three of these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows on the left and right. The upper two light emitting members in the right column constitute a first information display portion, and the upper two light emitting members in the left column constitute a second information display portion. Further, one lower light-emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display portion, and one lower light-emitting member in the left column constitutes a fourth information display portion.

Each of the first information display portion and the second information display portion is composed of two light emitting members, and a design is applied around each information display portion so that the two light emitting members are related to each other. At a glance, it can be seen that one information display section is composed of two light emitting members. Also, the third information display portion and the fourth information display portion are each composed of a single light-emitting member, but the designs around these information display portions are designed so that it can be seen that they are independent of each other. At a glance, it can be seen that the information display section is composed of one light emitting member. The design of the periphery of the light-emitting member is made to have a sense of unity with the design of the entire game machine so as not to impair the aesthetic appearance. Moreover, the design around the light-emitting member is not a sticker or the like but a member forming the guiding portion 616, which can reduce labor and cost in manufacturing.

Furthermore, in the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. is set. Although the details of the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described later, depending on the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 990 closes the large winning opening (closed state disadvantageous to the player). The opening/closing member 990 is retracted and converted to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) capable of receiving game balls flowing down the game area 32 . That is, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member 990 driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 109) as a driving device, and during the special game state (first special game state) During the small winning game state (second special game state), the closed state of the big winning hole is changed to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning hole and allowing the player to play a predetermined game. A game value (prize ball) is provided. Inside the big winning hole (winning area), a large winning hole switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 109) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole is arranged. .

In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, of the game area 32 in which game balls flow down, the area to the left of the center case 40 is defined as the left area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is defined as the right area. It is said that Then, the player adjusts the shooting momentum and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), so that the starting winning port 36 of the winning device 90, the second starting winning port 97, and the general winning port 35 are won. By shooting a game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), it is possible to aim for winning a prize to the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. ing.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game, and a normal figure start gate 34 are displayed. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a general pattern variation display game used as a trigger and for displaying various types of information.

Next, the special variable winning device 38 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the special variable winning device of the gaming machine of the second embodiment as seen from the front side.
The special variable winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950 , a rear wall member 960 , a body portion 970 and a cover member 979 .

The front wall member 950 has a plate-like front surface portion 951 . The front surface of the front surface part 951 is arranged close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, and game balls are prevented from flowing down in front of this front surface. In addition, the front surface of the front surface portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player, and is decorated with a lens that can partially transmit light. An LED (not shown) is arranged as a decoration means on the back surface of the front wall member 950, so that the special variable winning device 38 can be decorated with light. The color of the light that decorates the special variable winning device 38 is different from the color of light emitted from the collective display device 50, thereby preventing the display of the adjacent collective display device 50 from becoming difficult to understand. Further, the upper portion of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951 serves as a channel front wall 952 forming a side wall on the front side of the downstream channel.

The rear wall member 960 has a plate-like rear surface portion 961 . A front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and the portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. The upper portion of the rear surface portion 961 serves as a channel rear wall 962 forming a side wall on the rear side of the downstream channel. In addition, an opening/closing member inserting portion 963 is formed at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 962 so as to pass through the opening/closing member 990 from the back side of the rear wall member 960 .

A plurality of rear wall projecting portions 964 projecting forward are provided on the front side of the channel rear wall 962 . The rear wall projecting portion 964 is a triangular prism-shaped projecting portion with slanted left and right side surfaces, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recesses provided in the opening/closing member 990 . The rear wall projecting portion 964 and the concave portion have a function of guiding forward the game ball flowing leftward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the downflow path. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path. Since the rear wall projecting part 964 is provided adjacent to the recess, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the right side part of the downflow path in the part where the recess is not provided, and to surely meander the game ball. becomes possible.

In the central portion of the rear surface portion 961 and facing the portion in which the guide flow path 955 is formed in the front wall member 950, the guide flow path 955 penetrates back and forth so as to communicate with the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961. A through portion 968 is formed. Also, above the guide channel 955, a switch mounting portion 965 is formed that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to accommodate the rear portion of the big winning port switch 38a. Furthermore, in the right part of the rear surface part 961 and facing the part in which the general winning opening 35 is formed in the front wall member 950, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is pushed to the back side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966a that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed so as to communicate with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961 to guide the general winning opening flow path 966 .

The main body portion 970 has a rear wall portion 972 that forms the rear wall of the guiding channel 955 . In the rear wall portion 972 , at a position facing the through portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960 , a game ball guided to the rear surface of the rear wall member 960 through the through portion 968 is guided to the guide flow path 955 . A rib 973 is formed to guide it to the right along it. Further, a through portion 974 is formed in the rear wall portion 972 so as to face the downstream end portion of the guide flow path 955 formed in the rear wall member 960 . The game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 955 passes through the through portion 974, is guided to the back side of the main body portion 970, and flows into the discharge channel that discharges the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the portion facing the downstream end of the general winning opening flow path 966 formed in the rear wall member 960, a through hole for guiding the game ball flowing down the general winning opening flow path 966 to the back side of the main body part 970 A portion 975 is formed. The game ball that has flowed down the general winning port channel 966 is guided to the back side of the main body portion 970 through the penetrating portion 975, and after being detected by the winning port switch 35a (see FIG. 109), the game ball exits the gaming machine. is designed to flow into a discharge channel for discharging the

An opening/closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports an opening/closing member 990 that moves in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening/closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960 . The opening/closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-shaped penetrating portion penetrating the main body portion 970 in the front and rear direction, and can abut on the upper, lower, right, and left surfaces of the opening/closing member 990 to guide and support the opening/closing member 990 . A guide wall 977 is provided to extend along the front-rear direction.

An opening/closing member unit 980 having an opening/closing member 990 and an operation mechanism for operating the opening/closing member 990 is attached to the back side of the main body portion 970 . The opening/closing member unit 980 includes a unit base member for attaching various members, an opening/closing member 990 capable of sliding in the front-rear direction, and a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 109) for operating the opening/closing member 990. .

One end of the big winning opening solenoid 38 b is connected to the drive arm 983 . Further, the drive arm 983 has a rotating shaft 983b extending in the vertical direction, and can rotate about the rotating shaft 983b. When the special variable winning device 38 is closed, the drive shaft of the big winning opening solenoid 38b is extended and the drive arm 983 is positioned at the front end of the rotation range. When the special variable winning device 38 is opened from this state, the driving shaft of the big winning opening solenoid 38b is retracted so that the driving arm 983 rotates around the rotating shaft 983b in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the back side. to retract the opening/closing member 990 rearward. As a result, the special variable winning device 38 is opened. When the special variable prize winning device 38 is to be closed, the above operation is reversed.

In addition, the body portion 970 is provided with a V door 520 at a position where the guide channel 955 formed by the body portion 970 and the rear wall member 960 becomes an inflow portion of a V channel 955a formed by branching. . The V door 520 is slid forward and backward by a specific area solenoid 520a (see FIG. 109) to prevent inflow into the V flow path 955a, and retreats backward to allow inflow into the V flow path 955a. It is designed to be changed to the allowable state to be used.

Further, the body portion 970 is provided with a specific area switch 460 for detecting game balls that have flowed into the V flow path 955a.
In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the V flow path 955a is detected by the specific area switch 460 that detects the game ball that has flowed into the V flow path 955a. It is designed to flow into a discharge channel for discharging game balls to the outside of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special game state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but game balls flow into the V flow path 955a in the special game state and the specific area switch 460 A high-probability state is set based on detection by

In addition, the main body portion 970 is configured such that the guiding flow path 955 formed by the main body part 970 and the rear wall member 960 is formed by branching the game ball into the discharge ball flow path 955b. A through-hole 462 for guiding to the back side and a remaining ball discharge switch 461 for detecting game balls flowing down the discharged ball flow path 955b are provided.

Next, a game machine control system will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing an example of a game machine control system according to the second embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 includes a CPU section 110 having a game microcomputer 111, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like. It consists of a data bus 140 and the like connecting between the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section .

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine 10, a starter 1 switch 36a in the prize winning device 90, a starter 2 switch 37a in the normal variable prize winning device 37, Gate switch 34a in normal figure starting gate 34, winning mouth switch 35a, big winning mouth switch 38a in special variable winning device 38, starting mouth 2 switch 97a in winning device 90, specific region switch in special variable winning device 38 460, a negative logic signal with a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from these switches is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V (proximity I/F). 121 is provided. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals and sensors and An abnormality detection signal 1 output when an abnormality of the switch is detected is input to the second input port 123 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, or the glass frame open detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 or the like. A detection signal from the switch 63 and a detection signal from a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switches 37a and 97a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. there is

In the second embodiment, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and includes a large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the special variable winning device 38, a specific area solenoid 520a for opening the V door 520 of the special variable winning device 38, A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open/close data for the general electric solenoid 37c that opens the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. FIG.

Further, the output unit 130 receives opening/closing data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 520a and the general solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. (Drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a batch output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138 c for outputting an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the display device 50 , and an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device is output to the external information terminal board 71 . A fourth driver 138d is provided.

Next, the configuration of the screen on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG.
A screen 700 is the display content of the display device 41 . The screen 700 includes a large pattern group 701, a small pattern group 702, a special figure 1 reserved number display 703, a special figure 2 reserved number display 704, a reserved display 705, and a reserved consumption display 706 in the display contents.

The large pattern group 701 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the display device 41 displays the large pattern group 701 largely in the substantially central portion of the screen 700 . The large symbol group 701 includes left symbols, middle symbols and right symbols. The left, medium, and right symbols in the large symbol group 701 on the screen 700 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the variation display state.

The small symbol group 702 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the display device 41 displays the small pattern group 702 small on the periphery so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 701 . The small pattern group 702 independently secures the visibility of the pattern. The small symbol group 702 includes left symbols, middle symbols and right symbols. The left, medium and right symbols in the small symbol group 702 on the screen 700 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the variation display state.

In general, the large pattern group 701 is displayed larger than the small pattern group 702, has a high degree of freedom in display position, and can be greatly changed in its display mode. On the contrary, the small pattern group 702 is displayed smaller than the large pattern group 701, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 reserved number display 703 displays the number of reserved memories (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. Special figure 2 reserved number display 704 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. The pending display 705 can clearly indicate the number of pending memories of the special figure fluctuation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each pending memory by its display mode. The number of pending storage that the pending display 705 displays corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storage that the special figure 1 pending number display 703 displays and the number of pending storage that the special figure 2 pending number display 704 displays. The pending digestion display 706 can indicate, by its display mode, that the special figure variation display game is in a variation display state, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result.

In addition, the small pattern group 702, the special figure 1 reserved number display 703, and the special figure 2 reserved number display 704 are positioned so as not to enter the player's blind spot even by the operation of the board effect device 44 or the game ball rolling on the front side. , always clearly showing the variable display state and the number of reserved memories to the player.

Also, in the gaming machine 10, each of the large pattern group 701 and the small pattern group 702 is composed of three-digit patterns, but any number of digits may be used as long as one or more patterns are included. In the gaming machine 10, the large pattern group 701 and the small pattern group 702 have the same number of digits, but the large pattern group 701 and the small pattern group 702 have different numbers of digits. good too.

In addition, even if the game machine 10 changes the transparency of the large symbol group 701 (for example, changes the transparency from 0% to 50%) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display, For the small pattern group 702, the transparency of the pattern can be fixed (for example, the transparency is fixed to 0%). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the game state of the player with the small symbol group 702 while securing the diversity of the display effect for the large symbol group 701 .

In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the hue of the large symbol group 701 (for example, from red to blue) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display. For 702, the hue of the design can be fixed (eg, fixed to red). In addition, the game machine 10 may change the saturation of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 (for example, change the saturation from 100% to 0%) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display. Also, for the small pattern group 702, the saturation of the symbols can be fixed (for example, the saturation is fixed to 100%). Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the brightness of the large symbol group 701 during variable display and stop display, or during variable display (for example, change the brightness from 100% to 10%). The lightness of the small pattern group 702 can be fixed (for example, the lightness is fixed to 100%). In addition, the game machine 10 can change the size of the large symbol group 701 (for example, change from standard size to enlarged (reduced) size) between variable display and stop display, or during variable display. Even if there is, the size of the symbol can be fixed for the small symbol group 702 . Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the display position of the large symbol group 701 (for example, from the center of the screen to the upper right of the screen) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display. The display positions of the symbols can be fixed for the small symbol group 702 . In addition, the game machine 10 can change the design of the large symbol group 701 (for example, change from a rectangle to a circle, or change from numbers to characters) between variable display and stop display, or during variable display. Even if there is, it is possible to fix the design of the small pattern group 702 (for example, fix it to a number). In addition, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the variable display mode of the large symbol group 701 during variable display (for example, changes from vertical scrolling to horizontal scrolling), the variable display mode of the small symbol group 702 is changed. can be fixed (eg fixed to shaft rotation variation).

With these as well, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the game state of the player with the small symbol group 702 while securing the diversity of the display effect for the large symbol group 701 .
Also, the gaming machine 10 can make the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702 differ in variation mode during the variation display. For example, when the large symbol group 701 is vertically scrolled, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702 . In addition, the game machine 10 can reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player even when the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702 are updated asynchronously.

Next, the display effect of the big win of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 117. FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of the effect flow of the second embodiment. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of the effect flow of the second embodiment. 113 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 5) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 6) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG.

[Effect flow F11] The gaming machine 10 displays a change stop state (stop display state) before starting a change in the change display game. A screen example of the stop display state is shown in the screen 710 of FIG. 113 (F11).

A screen 710 shows a screen during symbol stop (during stop display). On the screen 710, the left symbols, the middle symbols and the right symbols of the large symbol group 701 are stopped, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being stopped and displayed. Also, on the screen 710, the left, middle and right symbols of the small symbol group are stopped, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a stopped state.

Further, on the screen 710, the pending digestion display 706 indicates that the special figure variation display game is not in the variation display state by blank display. Also, on the screen 710, the special figure 1 reserved number display 703 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "4", and the special figure 2 reserved number display 704 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is " 0", and the pending display 705 shows that the total number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game is "4".

When the game machine 10 starts the symbol variation, it proceeds to the production flow F12.
[Effect flow F12] The gaming machine 10 starts variable display. A screen 711 in FIG. 113 (F12) shows an example of the screen after the start of the variable display.

A screen 711 is a screen after the screen 710 and shows a screen after the start of the variable display. On the screen 711, the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern of the large pattern group 701 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated. Also, on the screen 711, the left, medium and right symbols of the small symbol group are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being variably displayed.

At this time, the game machine 10 makes the large pattern group 701 translucent on the screen 711 , thereby increasing the visibility of the background display more than the visibility of the large pattern group 701 . On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 does not make the small pattern group 702 semi-transparent on the screen 711, thereby ensuring visibility that takes precedence over the background display.

In addition, on the screen 711, the special figure 1 reserved number display 703 displays the value ("3") obtained by subtracting one from the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game ("4"), and the reserved display 705 shows the special figure fluctuation A value (“3”) obtained by subtracting one from “4” is displayed. A pending digestion display 706 displays a pending memory display that is being digested, and indicates that the special figure variation display game is in a variation display state.

The game machine 10 advances to the production flow F13 when deriving a loss, and advances to the production flow F14 when deriving a big hit (special game state).
[Effect flow F13] The gaming machine 10 displays the variable display result (loss). An example of the screen displaying the result of the variable display (loss) is shown in the screen 712 of FIG. 113 (F13).

A screen 712 is a screen subsequent to the screen 711 and shows a screen in which the result of the variable display is out.
On the screen 712, the large symbol group 701 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, indicating that the result of the variable display is a loss. In addition, on the screen 712, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, indicating that the variable display result is a loss.

[Effect flow F14] The gaming machine 10 displays the result of the variable display (big win). A screen 713 in FIG. 113 (F14) shows an example of the screen displaying the result of the variable display (big win).
A screen 713 is a screen subsequent to the screen 711 and shows a screen in which the variation display result is a big hit.

On the screen 713, the large symbol group 701 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a big win, and the variable display result indicates a big win. In addition, on the screen 713, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a pattern combination mode corresponding to a big hit, indicating that the variation display result is a big win.

The gaming machine 10 advances to the effect flow F15 after guiding the occurrence of the big win.
[Effect flow F15] The gaming machine 10 starts a big win effect. A screen 714 in FIG. 114 (F15) shows an example of the screen at the start of the jackpot effect.

A screen 714 is a screen subsequent to the screen 713 and shows a screen at the start of the big win effect. The screen 714 includes an effect display 715, a round display 716, and an accumulation display 717 in its display contents.

The effect display 715 is in charge of displaying effects such as images. On the screen 714, an effect display 715 displays an image or the like corresponding to a big hit. Note that the gaming machine 10 provides the effect display 715 only in a portion (central portion) of the screen 714, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 may provide the effect display 715 on the entire screen, and arrange other display elements (accumulation display 717 and round display 716) on the front side of the effect display 715. FIG.

The round display 716 displays the number of big win rounds (the number of times the big winning opening is opened) and the completion status (progress) of the rounds. Specifically, the round display 716 displays the number of rounds by the number of displayed heart symbols, and displays the completion status (progress) of the rounds by the lighting state of the heart symbols. On the screen 714, a round display 716 indicates that the number of rounds is "6" and that one round is yet to start by displaying six heart symbols in a lit state.

For example, there are three patterns of the number of rounds of the big win, ie, "6", "9", and "12" (6 rounds of big wins, 9 rounds of big wins, and 12 rounds of big wins). , displays a number of heart symbols equal to or less than the number of rounds of the jackpot (eg, 9 or less heart symbols if the jackpot generated is a 9-round jackpot).

The cumulative display 717 displays the cumulative status of rounds (cumulative rounds) within a predetermined period (within the cumulative period). The accumulation display 717 displays the accumulation status of rounds in a value obtained by converting a predetermined number of rounds into one unit (1 kyun). On the screen 714, the cumulative display 717 displays "1 kyun", indicating that the first unit (set) is being executed.

For example, the value displayed by the cumulative display 717 is used when determining the notification mode of the jackpot such as video and BGM. That is, the gaming machine 10 notifies an image or BGM according to the value displayed by the cumulative display 717 during the big win. Note that the predetermined period (accumulation period) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the correspondence (conversion rule) between rounds and ``kyun'', which is a unit of cumulative display, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between units of accumulated display and rounds according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 118, in the gaming machine 10, cumulative rounds "1 to 3" correspond to 1 kyu, cumulative rounds "4 to 6" correspond to 2 kyu, . 3n-2 to 3n" corresponds to n-kyun. In other words, kyun is a value obtained by unit conversion according to a conversion formula in which three rounds are converted as one unit. According to this, the gaming machine 10 converts the unit according to the conversion formula when the cumulative round is "1 to 3", and displays 1 kyu on the cumulative display 717 using the converted unit. , when the accumulated rounds are "4 to 6", the unit is converted according to the conversion formula, and the unit after conversion is used to display 2 kyun in the accumulated display 717, ..., the accumulated rounds are "3n- 2 to 3n", the unit is converted according to the conversion formula, and the cumulative display 717 displays n kyun using the converted unit. In this way, the gaming machine 10 notifies the player of the accumulated number of rounds by abstracting the rounds using the unit-converted value. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can perform information display without causing a decrease in interest of the player. The above is the correspondence relationship between the rounds and the unit of cumulative display.

In addition, the opening mode for each round may differ in the size of the opening time and the size of the maximum winning number. may have.

When such one indicator does not necessarily represent a single value, the player cannot properly grasp the value.
Also, if only high-value rounds are displayed while excluding low-value rounds out of the 15 rounds, or if the number of prize balls actually won is displayed, the player feels a gap between the displayed contents and expectations. something happened. An overly specific value display may spoil the player's sense of expectation and cause a decrease in interest. However, the gaming machine 10 can display information by abstracting the display of value without causing a decrease in the interest of the player.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the performance flow F16 after displaying the start of the big win performance.
[Effect Flow F16] The gaming machine 10 performs a normal round progress effect (a round progress effect without an additional round effect (promotion effect)). 114 (F16a1) screen 719, FIG. 114 (F16a2) screen 719, FIG. 114 (F16b1) screen 720, FIG. 115 (F16b2) screen 721, FIG. 115 (F16b3) Shown in screen 723 .

A screen 718 is a screen after the screen 714, and shows a screen during one round (during the opening of the first big prize opening). On the screen 718, the round display 716 indicates that the first round is in progress (the first big prize opening is being opened) by displaying the first heart symbol in a blinking state.

A screen 719 is a screen after the screen 718 and shows a screen after the end of the 1st round and before the start of the 2nd round (during the interval between the 1st round and the 2nd round). On the screen 719, the round display 716 displays the first heart symbol in a non-lit state and the second to sixth heart symbols in a lit state. during the interval between rounds 1 and 2).

A screen 720 is a screen after the screen 719, and shows a screen during the third round (during the opening of the third big prize winning opening). In screen 720, round indicator 716 indicates that three rounds are in progress by displaying a third heart symbol in a blinking state.

A screen 721 is a screen after the screen 720, and shows a screen when the value of the cumulative display 717 is added (counted up) by the end of the round (end of the round). The screen 721 includes a count-up display 722 in its display content. A count-up display 722 explicitly indicates that the value displayed by the cumulative display 717 is to be counted up (added). On screen 721 , count-up display 722 clearly indicates that the value displayed by cumulative display 717 is to be counted up by displaying “kyun”, which is the unit of cumulative display 717 .

A screen 723 is a screen after the screen 721 and shows a screen after the end of the 3rd round and before the start of the 4th round (during the interval between the 3rd round and the 4th round). On the screen 723, the round display 716 displays the 1st to 3rd heart symbols in the off state and the 4th to 6th heart symbols in the on state, so that after 3 rounds and 4 Indicates that it is before the start of the round (during the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds). On the screen 723, the cumulative display 717 displays the value ("2 kyun") counted up from "1 kyun" on the screen 720, and the second unit (set) is being executed. indicates that there is

As described above, in the normal round progress effect, the game machine 10 notifies the progress of the round by the round display 716, and notifies the image corresponding to the big win by the effect display 715, and advances the round.

When the number of lit heart symbols becomes 0 as a result of progressing rounds, that is, when the number of remaining rounds becomes 0, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F23.
As a result of progressing rounds, the gaming machine 10, when the round addition determination timing comes (the number of remaining rounds reaches a specified value (for example, 2) and the number of heart symbols reaches the display upper limit (for example, 12)). If the number of rounds has not been reached and there is room to add a round), the process proceeds to the production flow F17, and a special round progress production (a round progress production accompanied by an additional round production) is performed.

In cases other than the above, the game machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F16 and continues the normal round progress production.
[Effect Flow F17] The gaming machine 10 starts a round additional effect. A screen 724 in FIG. 115 (F17) shows an example of the screen when the round addition effect is started.

A screen 724 is a screen after the screen 723 and shows a screen at the start of the round addition effect. The screen 724 includes an effect display 715, a round display 716, an accumulation display 717, and an effect success/failure display 725 in its display contents.

The production success/failure display 725 is in charge of displaying the success/failure of the production. On the screen 724, the effect success/failure display 725 uses a heart-shaped symbol to display the success or failure of the additional round effect. Also, on the screen 724 , the effect success/failure display 725 is displayed on the front side of the effect display 715 . In this way, the gaming machine 10 secures visibility that takes precedence over the effect display 715 by displaying the effect success/failure display 725 on the front side rather than the effect display 715 . As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect (attention, visibility) of the effect success/failure display 725 and prevent the player from overlooking the additional round effect. In addition, on the screen 724, the round display 716 indicates that the fifth round is in progress (the fifth grand prize opening is being opened) by displaying the fifth heart symbol in a blinking state.

The game machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F18 after starting the round additional production.
[Production Flow F18] The gaming machine 10 performs a success/failure promotion production to incite whether or not the additional round production will be successful. A screen 726 in FIG. 115 (F17) shows an example of the screen during the success/failure demonstration.

A screen 726 is a screen subsequent to the screen 724 and shows a screen in a success/failure inciting effect execution state for inciting the success/failure of the round addition effect. On the screen 726, an effect success/failure display 725 displays an effect (success/failure effect) in which the heart-shaped symbol stops with the characters "development" displayed on the surface, and whether the effect will succeed or not. .

The game machine 10 proceeds to the performance flow F19 when the performance ends successfully (when the round is added), and proceeds to the performance flow F21 when the performance ends unsuccessfully (when the round is not added).

[Effect flow F19] The gaming machine 10 performs a success display. A screen 727 of FIG. 116 (F19) shows an example of a successful display.
A screen 727 is a screen after the screen 726 and shows a screen displayed when the effect is successful. On the screen 727, the production success/failure display 725 stops displaying a heart-shaped symbol with the characters "development" displayed on the surface, indicating that the production has been successful.

The gaming machine 10 advances to the effect flow F20 when the success display is made.
[Effect Flow F20] The gaming machine 10 adds a round. An example of the screen after adding the round is shown in screen 728 in FIG. 116 (F20).

Screen 728 is the screen after screen 727 and shows the screen after the round has been added. On the screen 728, the round display 716 increases the number of heart symbols that make up the screen 727 (6 heart symbols) by 3 (for 1 kyu), and 9 heart symbols ( 9 rounds).

When the game machine 10 adds a round, it proceeds to the production flow F21.
[Effect flow F21] The gaming machine 10 performs a failure display. A screen example of the failure display is shown in screen 729 in FIG. 116 (F21).

A screen 729 is a screen after the screen 726 and shows a screen displayed when the effect fails. On the screen 729, an effect success/failure display 725 displays a broken heart-shaped symbol to indicate that the effect has failed.

The gaming machine 10 advances to the effect flow F22 when the failure is displayed.
[Effect flow F22] The gaming machine 10 displays the end of the round. Screen examples after completing the round are shown in screen 730 in FIG. 117 (F22a) and screen 731 in FIG. 117 (F22b).

Screen 730 is a screen after screen 728, and shows round display 716 extinguishing the heart symbol of the fifth round to clearly indicate that the fifth round has ended.

A screen 731 is a screen after the screen 729, and shows how the round display 716 turns off the heart symbol of the fifth round to indicate that the fifth round has ended.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F16 and starts the normal round progression production again.
[Effect flow F23] The gaming machine 10 ends the big win effect and stops the fluctuation.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 uses the performance success/failure display 725 during the big win performance to perform a round additional performance (promoting performance to improve the value of the big win (also referred to as rank-up performance or value improvement performance)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 gives the player a sense of expectation that a low-value jackpot (for example, a 6-round jackpot) will change (promote) to a high-value jackpot (for example, a 12-round jackpot). It can be used to improve interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the timing for performing the special round progress effect will be described more specifically. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing execution timings of the special round progress effect of the second embodiment.

Timing T11 indicates the timing when the gaming machine 10 ends the round, starts the interval, and the number of remaining rounds becomes 2 (prescribed value). Timing T12 indicates the timing at which the interval ends and the round starts. Timing T13 indicates the timing at which the round ends.

The gaming machine 10 continues the normal round progress effect until the number of remaining rounds reaches 2 (specified value) and the round starts (until timing T12). Then, when the round is started with the number of remaining rounds being 2 (specified value), the game machine 10 switches the effect type, and executes the special round progress effect during the round (from timing T12 to timing T13).

The above is the timing at which the gaming machine 10 executes the special round progress effect. It should be noted that the timing at which the gaming machine 10 executes the special round progress effect is an example and is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 may execute a special round progress effect within an interval (between timing T11 and timing T12) when the number of remaining rounds is 2 (specified value), or the number of remaining rounds is 2 specified value. ), a special round progress effect may be executed across the rounds from the interval in the state of .

Next, the accumulation period during which the cumulative display value is accumulated will be described with reference to FIG. 120 . FIG. 120 is a flow chart of the cumulative round counter clearing process according to the second embodiment.
A cumulative round counter is a counter that counts the cumulative number of rounds. The cumulative round counter clearing process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 within the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102).

[Step D100] The controller determines whether or not the value of the cumulative round counter is 0 (the number of cumulative rounds is 0). If the control unit determines that the value of the cumulative round counter is 0, it ends the cumulative round counter clear process, and if it determines that the value of the cumulative round counter is not 0, it proceeds to step D101.

[Step D101] The control unit determines whether the game state is a high probability state (probability variable state) or a time saving state. The control unit ends the cumulative round counter clearing process when determining that the game state is the high probability state or the time saving state, and when determining that it is not the high probability state or the time saving state (normal state) Step D102 proceed to

[Step D102] The controller clears the value of the cumulative round counter (sets the value of the cumulative round counter to 0).
According to this, the game machine 10 continues accumulating the value of the cumulative round counter when it is in the high probability state or the time saving state, and clears the cumulative round counter when it is not in the high probability state or the time saving state. That is, the gaming machine 10 continues accumulating the value of the cumulative round counter when a big win occurs while the game is supported by the previous big win.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 keeps accumulating the value of the cumulative round counter when the previous big win contributes to the big win, so that the player can see the relevance to the previous big win. can be recognized.

Next, the display effect in the high probability state of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of the effect flow of the second embodiment. 122 is a diagram illustrating an example (7) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 8) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the second embodiment; FIG.

[Effect Flow F31] The gaming machine 10 displays a change stop state (stop display state) before starting a change in the change display game. A screen example of the fluctuation stopped state is shown in the screen 732 of FIG. 122 (F31).

The screen 732 includes a small pattern group 702, a special figure 1 reserved number display 703, a special figure 2 reserved number display 704, an effect display 715, and a symbol display 733 in the display contents.
The symbol display 733 is used in place of the large pattern group 701 and is in charge of announcing the variable display state. Specifically, the symbol display 733 notifies the variable display state by its display mode. The symbol display 733 displays a heart-shaped symbol. When the heart-shaped symbol is displayed in a stopped state, it indicates that the fluctuation is stopped. ) indicates that the variable display is in progress. Also, the symbol display 733 displays small symbols (symbols smaller than the large pattern group 701) on the periphery so as not to interfere with the display effect of the effect display 715 and ensure visibility.

On the screen 732, a symbol display 733 displays a heart-shaped symbol in a stopped state, indicating that fluctuation is stopped. Also, on the screen 732, the small symbol group 702 is in a stopped state, indicating that the fluctuation is stopped. On the screen 732, the effect display 715 displays an image or the like corresponding to the high probability state. Also, on the screen 732, the special figure 1 reserved number display 703 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "2", and the special figure 2 reserved number display 704 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is " 3”.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 uses the symbol display 733 instead of the large pattern group 701, thereby ensuring the visibility of the effect display 715 and informing the player of the variable display state.
The gaming machine 10 advances to the production flow F32 when the game does not develop into the ready-to-win state, and advances to the production flow F33 when the game develops into the ready-to-win state.

[Effect flow F32] The gaming machine 10 displays the variable display result (loss). A screen 734 of FIG. 122 (F32a) shows an example of a screen during variable display when the game does not develop into a reach, and a screen 735 of FIG.

A screen 734 is a screen subsequent to the screen 732 and shows a screen during variable display when the reach does not develop. On the screen 734, the symbol display 733 indicates that the heart-shaped symbol is being variably displayed. Also, on the screen 734, the left, medium and right symbols of the small symbol group 702 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being variably displayed.

Also, on the screen 734, the special figure 1 reserved number display 703 displays "2", and the special figure 2 reserved number display 704 is the value obtained by subtracting one from "3" for the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game ( "2") is displayed.

A screen 735 is a screen subsequent to the screen 734 and shows a screen for displaying the result of the variable display (loss). On the screen 735, the symbol display 733 stops displaying the heart-shaped symbol in the same manner as before the start of the fluctuation, thereby ending the fluctuation display performed on the screen 734 and indicating that the fluctuation display result is a failure. . In addition, on the screen 735, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, indicating that the variable display result is a loss.

After displaying the variable display result (loss), the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F31.
[Effect flow F33] The gaming machine 10 starts a ready-to-win effect (derivation process effect for deriving a special game state). A screen 736 in FIG. 122 shows an example of the screen at the start of the ready-to-win effect.

A screen 736 is a screen after the screen 732 and shows a screen at the start of the ready-to-win effect.
The screen 736 includes a small pattern group 702, a special figure 1 reserved number display 703, a special figure 2 reserved number display 704, an effect display 715, and an effect success/failure display 725 in the display contents.

On the screen 736, the effect success/failure display 725 displays the success/failure of the ready-to-win effect using a heart-shaped symbol in the same manner as the round additional effect. Also, on the screen 736 , the effect success/failure display 725 is displayed on the front side of the effect display 715 . In this way, the gaming machine 10 secures visibility that takes precedence over the effect display 715 by displaying the effect success/failure display 725 on the front side rather than the effect display 715 . As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect (attention and visibility) of the effect success/failure display 725, and prevent the player from overlooking the ready-to-win effect.

Also, on the screen 736, the left, middle and right symbols of the small symbol group 702 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated. Also, on the screen 736, the special figure 1 reserved number display 703 displays "2", and the special figure 2 reserved number display 704 is the value obtained by subtracting one from the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game from "3" ( "2") is displayed.

When the ready-to-win effect is started, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F34.
[Production Flow F34] The gaming machine 10 performs a success/failure promotion production to incite whether or not the ready-to-win production will succeed. A screen 737 in FIG. 123 (F34) shows an example of the screen during the success/failure demonstration.

A screen 737 is a screen subsequent to the screen 736, and shows a screen in a success/failure inciting effect execution state for inciting the success/failure of the ready-to-win effect. On the screen 737, the effect success/failure display 725 is a success/failure display 725 in which a heart-shaped symbol stops with the characters "development" displayed on the surface, as in the case of the additional round effect, to incite whether or not the effect will succeed. show the performance.

The game machine 10 proceeds to the performance flow F36 when the performance ends in success (when deriving a big hit), and proceeds to the performance flow F35 when the performance ends in failure (when deriving a loss).

[Effect flow F35] The gaming machine 10 performs a failure display. A screen example of the failure display is shown in the screen 738 of FIG. 123 (F35).
A screen 738 is a screen after the screen 737 and shows a screen displayed when the effect fails. On the screen 738, the effect success/failure display 725 displays a broken heart-shaped symbol to indicate that the effect has failed. In addition, on the screen 738, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, indicating that the variable display result is a loss.

The game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F31 after displaying the failure.
[Effect flow F36] The gaming machine 10 performs a success display. A screen example of a successful display is shown in the screen 739 of FIG. 123 (F36).

A screen 739 is a screen after the screen 737 and shows a screen displayed when the effect is successful. On the screen 739, the production success/failure display 725 stops displaying a heart-shaped symbol with the characters "Development" displayed on the surface, indicating that the production has been successful. Also, on the screen 739, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a pattern combination mode corresponding to a big hit, indicating that the variation display result is a big win.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F37 after displaying the success.
[Effect flow F37] The gaming machine 10 starts a big win effect. A screen 740 in FIG. 123 (F37) shows an example of the screen at the start of the jackpot effect.

A screen 740 is a screen after the screen 739 and shows a screen at the start of the big win effect. On the screen 740, an effect display 715 displays an image or the like corresponding to a big hit. On the screen 740, a round display 716 indicates that the number of rounds is "6" and that one round is yet to start by displaying six lit heart symbols. On the screen 740, the cumulative display 717 displays "11 kyun", indicating that the 11th unit (set) is being executed.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 uses the effect success/failure display 725 to perform the high-probability ready-to-win effect. That is, the game machine 10 executes the ready-to-win effect in the high-probability state and the promotion effect during the big-hit effect in the same effect mode.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to distinguish between the ready-to-win effect in the high-probability state and the promotion effect during the jackpot effect. For example, when the ready-to-win effect in a high-probability state leads to a big win, and a promotion effect is performed within the big win, the game machine 10 can give a sense of unity to the series of effects by executing the same effect mode. can.

Also, since the ready-to-win effect in the high-probability state and the promotion effect are made to be the same effect mode, the gaming machine 10 increases the number of times the effect success/failure display 725 performs the success display in the high-probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the bodily sensation frequency of occurrence of a big win equal to or greater than the actual number of occurrences of a big win (it is possible to give the player the feeling that the big win is occurring more than the actual occurrence). can).

In general, players have limited opportunities to experience the promotion performance in the special game state (big win), and therefore cannot understand the details of the promotion performance. Sometimes it was not possible. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 makes a part of the promotion effect and a part of the ready-to-win effect (derivation process effect) in the high-probability state the same effect, so that the opportunity to deepen the understanding of the effect content is expanded. can improve interest.

[Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 1 of the second embodiment; FIG.

A screen 741 is a modification of the screen 732 shown in FIG. 122 (F31). A screen 741 shows a state in which a symbol display 733a displaying a star-shaped symbol is used instead of the symbol display 733 displaying a heart-shaped symbol.

A screen 742 is a modification of the screen 732 shown in FIG. 122 (F31). A screen 742 shows a state in which a symbol display 733b displaying a character-shaped symbol is used instead of the symbol display 733 displaying a heart-shaped symbol.

A screen 743 is a modification of the screen 732 shown in FIG. 122 (F31). A screen 743 shows a symbol display 733c displaying two character-shaped symbols (two symbols) instead of the symbol display 733 displaying a heart-shaped symbol.

The above is Modification 1 of the second embodiment. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can use symbols other than hearts (star-shaped symbols) and symbols composed of character symbols. Also, the gaming machine 10 can use a symbol display composed of two or more symbols.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including Modification 1) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes effect means (display device 41) capable of producing a variable display game, and a first game state capable of deriving a special game state (big win) with a first probability in the variable display game ( Normal probability state) and a second game state (high probability state: variable state) capable of deriving a special game state with a second probability higher than the first probability Control means (game control device 100, Effect control device 300). The control means presents at least a part of the derivation process effect (reach effect) of the special game state performed in the second game state, and the first value (the number of rounds) for the special game state, and then the first value. At least a part of promotion performance (round additional performance) presenting a second value (number of rounds) with a higher value is shared and performance control is performed by a performance means.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 125 to 127. FIG. In the gaming machine 10 shown in the third embodiment, the player can select an effect mode (for example, character, background, etc.), and the gaming machine 10 executes an effect according to the effect mode selected by the player. . In the following description, an example in which a player selects a character will be used. First, in the gaming machine 10, characters that can be selected by the player and effects executed when each character is selected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the correspondence between characters and effects in the third embodiment.

FIG. 125 shows the correspondence between characters that can be selected in the gaming machine 10 and effects that can be executed when each character is selected. In the gaming machine 10, character A, character B, . . . , character N can be selected. If character N is selected, effects B1 to Bn can be executed, and effects N1 to Nn can be executed. The above is the corresponding relationship between selectable characters and effects.

Next, the timing at which character selection (change) can be accepted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing timings at which character selection can be accepted according to the third embodiment.

The game machine 10 starts symbol variation at timing T11 from the state of stop display (variation stop), and starts the N-th variation display. After that, the gaming machine 10 starts a ready-to-win effect for deriving a loss from timing T12. After that, when the game machine 10 notifies the variable display result (result mode: lost) at timing T13 and ends the ready-to-win effect, character selection (change) is not performed until timing T14 when the N-th variable display ends. A possible character selection effect (character selection screen display) is performed.

According to this, in the gaming machine 10, when the ready-to-win effect for deriving the loss is performed in the variable display game, the player selects (changes) the character in the variable-display game in which the ready-to-reach effect for deriving the loss is performed. ) can be given the opportunity to do so.

For example, if the character selection effect is performed before starting the ready-to-win effect, the content of the ready-to-win effect may change depending on the character selected by the player. Therefore, when preparing an effect at the start of the variation until the end of the variation, the gaming machine 10 must prepare in advance all the effects corresponding to the characters to be options (characters that may be selected). I had to.

On the other hand, when accepting character selection after deriving a loss, the gaming machine 10 does not need to prepare a plurality of ready-to-win effects. , the player can be given an opportunity to select a character while suppressing the processing load.

In addition, the game machine 10 can provide an opportunity to change feelings such as dissatisfaction caused by the occurrence of a failure by providing an opportunity to select a character after the ready-to-win performance of deriving the failure and making it possible to change the character. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from becoming too absorbed in it.

Depending on the game machine, when the effect control device receives the stop command issued by the game control device, the variable display may end. In general, the length of the ready-to-win effect (time to reach the losing screen) is predetermined, so such a game machine receives a stop command due to some error when it stops fluctuating after the ready-to-win effect (displaying the losing screen). If there is a delay in receiving, the player will have to wait on a screen for the amount of delay in reception, which may give the player a sense of incompatibility. In that respect, if the character selection effect (display of the character selection screen) is performed after the ready-to-win effect (display of the lost screen), such a game machine will not be able to complete the character selection time even if the reception of the stop command is delayed due to some error. can be lengthened, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

Next, an example of a screen at the character selection acceptance effect will be described with reference to FIG. 127 . 127 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment; FIG.
A screen 750 is a screen (character selection screen) during the character selection effect. The screen 750 includes a selected character display 751 , an option character display 752 , an operation method display 753 , an operation content display 754 , and a timer display 755 as display contents.

The selected character display 751 displays the currently selected character, that is, the changed character. On the screen 750, the selected character display 751 displays a tiger-like character to indicate that the currently selected character is a tiger-like character.

The option character display 752 displays selectable characters. Also, the option character display 752 displays the currently selected character in a distinguishable manner. On the screen 750, an option character display 752 displays a tiger-like character, a pig-like character, and a lion-like character. Indicates that a character such as is selectable. On the screen 750, the option character display 752 displays the background display of the tiger-like character so as to be distinguishable from the background displays of other characters, indicating that the currently selected character is the tiger-like character. .

For example, when the character selection screen is started to be displayed (initial state), the game machine 10 starts from a state in which the currently set character before change is initially selected.

The operation method display 753 displays the operation method. On the screen 750, an operation method display 753 displays an image image of the push button (option setting section 25), thereby indicating that the character is selected with the push button.

The operation content display 754 displays the operation content. On the screen 750, an operation content display 754 indicates that the screen being displayed is a character selection screen by displaying a message "Please select your favorite character."

A timer display 755 displays the operation time. On the screen 750, a timer display 755 displays a bar-type timer, and displays the remaining time of the selection operation according to the display mode of the displayed bar-type timer.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may select the character used in the last ready-to-win effect when no operation is received from the player in the character selection effect, or may select the character used in the last ready-to-win effect. A character different from the character may be selected.

For example, the game machine 10 selects a character different from the character used in the previous ready-to-win effect, thereby promoting the change of characters and preventing the player from becoming bored with the effect.

In addition, although the case where the ready-to-win effect derives the loss has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the ready-to-win effect leads to a big win, the character selection effect can be similarly performed after the result mode (big win) is announced.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In Modified Example 1 of the third embodiment, part of the ready-to-win effect is replaced and the character selection effect is executed within the ready-to-win effect. Specific timing of the character selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing timings at which character selection can be accepted according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 128, the gaming machine 10 starts symbol variation at timing T11, starts the N-th variation display, and is composed of a plurality of performance parts from timing T12. , and ends the ready-to-win effect (loss) at timing T13.

When the character selection effect is not performed in the N-th variable display, the game machine 10 performs effect 1, effect 2, and effect 3 in the ready-to-win effect (between timing T12 and timing T13).

On the other hand, when performing the character selection effect in the N-th variable display, the game machine 10 performs effect 1, effect 3, and character selection effect in the ready-to-win effect (between timing T12 and timing T13).

In this way, the game machine 10 replaces a part of the production with the character selection production (by omitting part of the production and adding the character selection production), so that the ready-to-win production can be performed in the ready-to-win production instead of after the ready-to-win production. A character selection effect can be performed (between timing T12 and timing T13).

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the modification 2 of the third embodiment, the character selection effect is performed after the ready-to-win effect for deriving the loss based on the number of effects performed by the selected character (the number of ready-to-win effects or the number of ready-to-win effects for deriving the loss). decide whether or not to

The flow for determining whether or not to perform the character selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of the losing effect setting process of Modification 2 of the third embodiment.

The loss effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The loss effect setting process is a process of setting the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect for deriving the loss.

[Step D110] The control section determines whether or not the number of effects executed by the currently selected character satisfies a predetermined condition.
For example, the control unit determines whether or not the number of effects executed by the currently selected character exceeds a predetermined number. In addition, for example, the control unit determines whether or not the number of times of rendering executed by the currently selected character is a predetermined number of times (10 times, 20 times, 30 times).

The control unit proceeds to step D111 when determining that the number of times of performance executed by the currently selected character satisfies the predetermined condition, and proceeds to step D112 when determining that the number of times of performance does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Step D111] The control unit sets a losing effect mode with a character selection effect.
[Step D112] The control unit sets a losing effect mode without a character selection effect.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the character selection effect when the number of times of effect of the selected character satisfies a predetermined condition. That is, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with an opportunity to select a character at the timing when the number of performances of the selected character satisfies a predetermined condition. As a result, the game machine 10 can prevent the character selection effect from being excessively performed.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 3 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the modification 3 of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not to perform the character selection effect after the ready-to-win effect for deriving the loss based on the effect history.

The flow for determining whether or not to perform the character selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of the losing effect setting process of Modification 3 of the third embodiment.

The loss effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The loss effect setting process is a process of setting the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect for deriving the loss.

[Step D120] The control section evaluates the effect history.
[Step D121] The controller determines whether the evaluation result satisfies a predetermined condition.
For example, the control unit evaluates the production history to determine whether the character's production recovery rate (ratio of the ready-to-win production executed out of the ready-to-win production associated with the character) satisfies a certain ratio (predetermined condition). judge.

The control unit proceeds to step D122 when determining that the evaluation result satisfies the predetermined condition, and proceeds to step D123 when determining that the evaluation result does not satisfy the predetermined condition.
[Step D122] The control unit sets a losing effect mode with a character selection effect.

[Step D123] The control unit sets a losing effect mode without a character selection effect.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a character selection effect when the effect history of the character being selected satisfies a predetermined condition. That is, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with an opportunity to select a character at the timing when the evaluation result of the effect history of the character being selected satisfies a predetermined condition. As a result, the game machine 10 can prevent the character selection effect from being excessively performed.

[Modification 4 of Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 4 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In Modified Example 4 of the third embodiment, characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are changed based on the result of prefetching. The flow of processing for changing the selectable characters on the character selection screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of character selection effect setting processing according to modification 4 of the third embodiment.

The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 within the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process of setting the effect mode of the character selection effect.

[Step D130] The control unit determines whether or not there is a jackpot in the reserve. The control unit proceeds to step D131 when it determines that there is a big win in the reserve, and proceeds to step D132 when it determines that there is no big win in the reserve.

[Step D131] The control section sets a special option pattern including a special character as an option on the character selection screen.
[Step D132] The control unit sets the normal option pattern, which does not include special characters, as the options on the character selection screen.

Although it has been explained that the special option pattern is set when there is a big hit in the reserve, the present invention is not limited to this. The gaming machine 10 may change the options based on the result of pending look-ahead, and may set a special option pattern, for example, when there is a pending value equal to or greater than a predetermined expected value.

Next, the character selection screen when options include a special character will be described with reference to FIG. 132 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 4 of the third embodiment; FIG.

A screen 760 is a character selection screen that does not include special characters as options, and an option character display 752 displays a tiger-like character, a pig-like character, and a lion-like character as options. indicates that the

A screen 760 shows a screen in a state (initial state) when the display of the character selection screen is started. That is, the screen 760 indicates that the currently set character before change is a pig-like character.

A screen 761 is a character selection screen including special characters as options, and the option character display 752 includes a tiger-like character, a pig-like character, and a lion-like character. The screen 760) shows a state in which a character such as a tiger wearing sunglasses, which is not displayed on the screen 760), is displayed as an option.

A screen 761 shows a screen that is in a state (initial state) when the display of the character selection screen is started. That is, the screen 761 indicates that the currently set character before change is a tiger-like character wearing sunglasses.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen based on the result of prefetching. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player have a sense of anticipation for the effect that will be performed in the subsequent variable display game.

Next, modified examples of the selection screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 4 of the third embodiment; FIG. 134 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 4 of the third embodiment; FIG. 135 is a diagram (part 4) illustrating an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 4 of the third embodiment; FIG.

Screen 762 is a modification of screen 760, which is the state (initial state) at the start of display of the character selection screen. Shows the screen arranged accordingly. On the screen 762, an option character display 752 displays characters to be options in an array in which a pig-like character (initial option), which is the currently set character before change, is arranged on the leftmost side.

It should be noted that the initial option refers to the option being selected when the option is presented. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the selection operation by the player. For example, the game machine 10 sets the currently set option (character) as the initial option, and thus, by one selection operation (for example, left shift operation or right shift operation of the option), options other than the currently set option can be selected. option can be selected. In addition, the game machine 10 can set the currently set option as the initial option, so that the currently set option is being selected by not performing the selection operation.

A screen 763 is a modification of the character selection screen shown in the screen 761, which is in a state (initial state) when the character selection screen starts to be displayed. Shows the screen arranged accordingly. On the screen 763, an option character display 752 displays the characters to be options in an array in which the currently set character before change, which looks like a tiger wearing sunglasses (initial option), is arranged on the leftmost side. is doing.

Screen 764 is a modification of screen 761, which is the state (initial state) at the start of display of the character selection screen. shows the screen On the screen 764, the option character display 752 is to the left of the character (initial option) that looks like a tiger wearing sunglasses, which is the character before the change, which is currently set. The selected character is displayed, and the unselected character is displayed on the right side.

Specifically, on the screen 764, the option character display 752 includes the character that was selected two characters ago, the character that was selected one character before, the currently set character before change, and the characters that have not been selected. Characters to be options are displayed in an array arranged in order. In addition, the option character display 752 displays previously selected characters and unselected characters in a distinguishable manner.

By the way, when the character arrangement is fixed, the player does not necessarily select the characters according to a predetermined rule (for example, in order from the left). It may become unclear which character has not been selected (which character has been selected). As a result, the player may mistakenly select an already selected character when attempting to select an unselected character.

In this regard, if the options are displayed in an arrangement corresponding to the character selection history as shown in the option character display 752 on the screen 764, the gaming machine 10 can allow the player to easily grasp the character selected in the past. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can assist the player in character selection by allowing the player to grasp the selection status.

In the screen 764, the option character display 752 displays the character selected up to two characters ago as the character selected in the past.

The character selection history may be a selection history during a series of big wins, a selection history from the previous customer waiting state, a selection history at a predetermined time, or a predetermined character selection history. It may be a selection history up to several years ago.

Screen 765 is a modification of screen 764, which is the state (initial state) at the start of display of the character selection screen. Along with this, a screen is shown in which some of the options are hidden. In the screen 765, the option character display 752 displays the selected character so that it can be distinguished by enlarging the size of the selected character.

On the screen 765, the option character display 752 displays the currently selected character (initial option) in the center, the previously selected character on the left side, and the unselected character on the right side.

Also, on the screen 765, the option character display 752 displays some of the previously selected characters and some of the unselected characters so that they cannot be seen.
For example, in the option character display 752 on the screen 765, when the operator presses the left side of the push button, each option (each character) slides to the right by one. Specifically, a tiger-like character is selected (slightly larger) and placed in the center, a human-like character is hidden, and a pig-like character is selected in front of it. The character that has moved (located one to the left) is displayed.

In the option character display 752 on the screen 765, when the operator presses the right side of the push button, each option (each character) is slid to the left by one. Specifically, a lion-like character is selected and placed in the center, a pig-like character is hidden, and an unselected character positioned to the right of the human-like character is displayed. be.

A screen 766 is a music selection screen for changing music as a change of the presentation mode, and shows the state (initial state) when the music selection screen is started to be displayed. The screen 766 includes a selected music display 751a, an option music display 752a, an operation method display 753, an operation content display 754a, and a timer display 755 in its display contents.

The selected music display 751a displays the currently selected music, that is, the changed music. On the screen 766, the currently selected music display 751a displays the currently set music before change (initial choice), which is music: AAA, and indicates that the currently selected music is AAA. When music is selected, the gaming machine 10 outputs the music being selected in the selected music display 751a from the speakers 19a and 19b. As a result, the gaming machine 10 assists the player in selecting music.

The option song display 752a displays selectable songs. Further, the option music display 752a displays the currently selected music in a distinguishable manner. Also, the option song display 752a displays previously selected songs and unselected songs in a distinguishable manner. On the screen 766, the option song display 752a displays songs: BBB, songs: CCC, songs: AAA, songs: DDD, and "BBB", "CCC", "AAA", and "DDD". ” can be selected as music. On the screen 766, the option song display 752a displays previously selected songs (“BBB” and “CCC”) and unselected songs (“DDD”) in a distinguishable manner.

On the screen 766, the operation content display 754a indicates that the screen being displayed is the music selection screen by displaying the message "Please select your favorite music."
A screen 767 is a notification pattern selection screen for changing the notification pattern as the effect mode change, and shows the state (initial state) at the start of display of the notification pattern selection screen. The screen 767 includes a selected notification pattern display 751b, an option notification pattern display 752b, an operation method display 753, an operation content display 754b, and a timer display 755 in the display contents.

The selected notification pattern display 751b displays the currently selected notification pattern, that is, the changed notification pattern.
On the screen 767, the selected notification pattern display 751b displays "complete notification" which is the currently set notification pattern before change (initial option), and the currently selected notification pattern notifies even the variation result such as a big hit. indicates that it is a complete notice to

The option notification pattern display 752b displays selectable notification patterns. In addition, the option notification pattern display 752b displays the currently selected notification pattern in a distinguishable manner. On the screen 767, the option notification pattern display 752a displays chance notification, complete notification, and no notification, and "chance notification", "complete notification", and "no notification" can be selected as notification patterns. indicates that there is

On the screen 767, the operation content display 754b displays the message "Please select your favorite notification pattern" to indicate that the screen being displayed is the notification pattern selection screen.

In addition, although change of a character, a change of a music, and a change of an announcement pattern were explained as a change of production mode, they are not limited to these. For example, it is possible to change the decoration mode, the presence or absence of the effect of the board effect device 44, etc. as the change of the effect mode.

[Modification 5 of Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 5 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In Modified Example 5 of the third embodiment, the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are varied based on the number of effects (the number of ready-to-win effects or the number of ready-to-win effects for deriving a loss).

The flow of processing for changing the selectable characters on the character selection screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of character selection effect setting processing according to modification 5 of the third embodiment.

The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 within the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process of setting the effect mode of the character selection effect.

[Step D140] The control unit determines whether or not the number of effects satisfies a predetermined condition. The control unit proceeds to step D141 when determining that the number of times of presentation satisfies the predetermined condition, and proceeds to step D142 when determining that the number of times of presentation does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Step D141] The control section sets a special option pattern including a special character as an option on the character selection screen.
[Step D142] The control unit sets a normal option pattern that does not include a special character as an option on the character selection screen.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen based on the number of effects.
By making it possible to select a special character according to the number of performances in this way, the game machine 10 can increase the value of the ready-to-win performance for deriving the loss (giving value to the ready-to-win performance for deriving the loss).

[Modification 6 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 6 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the sixth modification of the third embodiment, the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are made different based on the effect history. The flow of processing for changing the selectable characters on the character selection screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of character selection effect setting processing according to modification 6 of the third embodiment.

The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 within the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process of setting the effect mode of the character selection effect.

[Step D150] The control section evaluates the effect history.
[Step D151] The controller determines whether the evaluation result satisfies a predetermined condition.
The control unit proceeds to step D152 when determining that the evaluation result satisfies the predetermined condition, and proceeds to step D153 when determining that the evaluation result does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Step D152] The controller sets a special option pattern including a special character as an option on the character selection screen.
[Step D153] The control unit sets a normal option pattern that does not include a special character as an option on the character selection screen.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen based on the effect history.
By making it possible to select a special character according to the performance history in this way, the game machine 10 can increase the value of the ready-to-win performance for deriving the loss (giving value to the ready-to-win performance for deriving the loss).

[Modification 7 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 7 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In Modified Example 7 of the third embodiment, the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are changed according to the currently selected character. First, FIG. 138 will be described. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of character selection effect setting processing according to Modification 7 of the third embodiment.

The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 within the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process of setting the effect mode of the character selection effect.

[Step D160] The control unit acquires an option pattern corresponding to the currently selected character.
[Step D161] The control unit sets the acquired option patterns as options on the character selection screen.

Next, the correspondence relationship between the currently selected character and the options will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of options corresponding to the currently selected character in Modification 7 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the character being selected is a character 770 (a tiger-like character), a character 770, a character 771 (a pig-like character), and a character 772 (a lion-like character) are selected. ) and a character 773 (a tiger-like character wearing sunglasses) are available as options. That is, when the character 770 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770, the character 771, the character 772, and the character 773 are options.

Also, when the character being selected is the character 771, the character 770, the character 771, and the character 772 are options. That is, when the character 771 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770, the character 771, and the character 772 are options.

Also, when the character being selected is the character 772, the character 770, the character 771, and the character 772 are options. That is, when the character 772 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770, the character 771, and the character 772 are options.

Also, when the character being selected is the character 773, the character 770 and the character 773 are options. That is, when the character 773 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770 and the character 773 are options. The above is the correspondence between the character being selected and the options.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the characters selectable on the character selection screen according to the character being selected.
The gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including modified examples 1 to 7) has the following features in one aspect.

(1) The game machine 10 includes effect means (display device 41), operation reception means (option setting unit 25: push buttons), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The effect means can effect the variable display game in one effect mode set from among two or more effect modes (characters). The operation receiving means can receive a player's operation. The control means derives a result mode (loss) leaving a predetermined operation selection time (from T13 to T14 in FIG. 126) in the variation time in the variable display game, receives the player's operation during the selection operation time, One production mode is set from the above production modes.

(2) The game machine 10 includes effect means (display device 41), operation reception means (option setting unit 25: push buttons), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The effect means can effect the variable display game in one effect mode set from among two or more effect modes (characters). The operation receiving means can receive a player's operation. The control means derives a result mode (loss) while leaving a predetermined selection operation time in the variation time in the variable display game, receives the player's operation, and sets one performance mode out of two or more performance modes. do. The control means, when presenting two or more presentation modes as options during the selection operation time, sets the presently set presentation mode as an initial option.

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the notification of the occurrence of the high probability state based on the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path 955a in the special game state is delayed from the detection time instead of the detection time of the specific area switch 460. Do it in time. The game machine 10 is set to a high probability state based on the game ball being detected by the specific area switch 460 .

First, the hit corresponding to the special game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of performance per hit according to the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes "win A" and "win B" in the win types.

Win A has no probability change, that is, the probability state after the end of the win is a low probability state. In addition, the number of rounds in winning A is "9 (9R)". In addition, the hit A has 6R for short opening with a relatively short opening time and 3R for long opening with a relatively long opening time, so the actual number of rounds is "3 (3R)".

Win B is a high-probability state with variable probability, ie, a high-probability state after the end of a win, which is higher than the low-probability state. In addition, the number of rounds during the win B is "9 (9R)". In addition, the winning B is 3R for a short opening with a relatively short opening time, and 6R for a long opening with a relatively long opening time, so the actual number of rounds is "6 (6R)".

Therefore, the win B is more valuable to the player than the win A because the actual number of rounds is large in terms of the number of winning balls. Also, the win B is a win of higher value to the player than the win A because it is in a high probability state from the viewpoint of the probability state after the win.

In addition, the high probability state is based on the game ball passing through the specific area. Hit A has a high probability of being in a low-probability state because it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, but the high-probability state is not denied. In addition, hit B has a high probability of being in a high probability state because the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, but the high probability state is not guaranteed.

Here, the progress of the winning A game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a timing chart showing an example of the progress of the winning A game according to the fourth embodiment.
The game machine 10 is in a fanfare state due to the occurrence of a hit A, thereafter shifts to round 1, progresses to round 9 while progressing rounds at intervals, and ends win A through an ending.

Win A performs a fanfare effect for 10000 ms in the fanfare state. For hit A, 1R is short open for 100 ms. Winning A opens the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) for 100 ms in 1R, and opens the V door 520 at a predetermined timing to create a winning opportunity for the specific area switch 460. - 特許庁However, it is difficult to win the specific area switch 460 in the win A. Depending on whether or not the specific area switch 460 has won a prize, the gaming machine 10 determines whether to perform a winning A (V winning) effect or a winning A (V non-winning) effect.

Hit A is a long release of 25000 ms from 2R to 4R, and a short release of 100ms from 5R to 9R. That is, hit A has a substantial number of rounds of "3". Also, for the hit A, the interval between 1R and 2R is set to 2000 ms longer than the interval period of 1000 ms between 2R and 9R.

The performance of hit A (V prize) is a bonus performance from 1R to 3R, and the interval after 3R and 4R is V prize performance. That is, the performance of hit A (V prize) is performed by notifying the generation of the high probability state at a timing delayed from the game ball detection time instead of the game ball detection time of the specific area switch 460 . The effect of hit A (V prize) is performed from the interval after 4R to 9R, and the ending effect including the ending state of 2700 ms.

On the other hand, the effect of winning A (V non-winning) is a bonus effect from 1R to 4R. The effect of hit A (V non-winning) is performed from the interval after 4R to 9R, and the ending effect including the ending state of 2700 ms.

Next, the progress of the winning B game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a timing chart showing an example of the progress of the winning B game according to the fourth embodiment.
The game machine 10 enters a fanfare state due to the occurrence of the winning B, and thereafter shifts to the round 1, progresses to the round 9 while progressing the rounds at intervals, and ends the winning B through the ending.

Win B performs a fanfare effect for 10000 ms in the fanfare state. Hit B is a long open 1R of 25000ms. However, the opening mode is irregular, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 144 . Winning B opens the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) for a long time in 1R, opens the V door 520 at a predetermined timing, and creates a winning opportunity for the specific area switch 460. - 特許庁However, winning the specific area switch 460 in winning B is easy. Depending on whether or not the specific area switch 460 has won a prize, the gaming machine 10 determines whether to perform a win B (V win) effect or a win B (V non-win) effect.

Hit B is a long release of 25000ms from 1R to 6R, and a short release of 100ms from 7R to 9R. That is, hit B has a substantial number of rounds of "6". Also, for the hit B, the interval between 1R and 2R is set to 2000 ms longer than the interval period of 1000 ms between 2R and 9R.

The effect of winning B (V prize) is a bonus effect from 1R to 2R, and a V prize effect in the interval after 2R and 3R. That is, the performance of hit B (V winning) is performed by notifying the generation of the high probability state at a timing delayed from the game ball detection time instead of the game ball detection time of the specific area switch 460 . In the performance of winning B (V prize), another bonus performance is performed from the interval after 3R to 6R, and the ending performance including the ending state of 2700 ms is performed from the interval after 6R to 9R.

On the other hand, the effect of winning B (V non-winning) is a bonus effect from 1R to 2R, and a V non-winning effect in the interval after 2R and 3R. In the performance of winning B (V non-winning), the bonus performance is performed again from the interval after 3R to 6R, and the ending performance including the ending state of 2700 ms is performed from the interval after 6R to 9R.

Next, the jackpot commands of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot command list according to the fourth embodiment.
The game control device 100 transmits the effect command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A. A performance control device 300 receives a performance command and performs a required game performance. In addition, the effect control device 300 can execute a process corresponding to the effect command received in the jackpot command process (see FIG. 104) in step D58 of the received command analysis process.

The effect command (receiving command) includes MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte).
The jackpot commands include a fanfare command, a command for n-th opening of the big prize opening, an interval command, and an ending command. A fanfare command is specified by MODE "81H" and ACTION "01H". The n-th command for opening the big winning opening is specified by one of ACTION "01H" to "09H" corresponding to the MODE "82H" and the number of rounds "n". An interval command is specified by MODE "83H" and ACTION "01H". The ending command is specified by MODE "84H" and ACTION "01H".

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, a description will be given of the large winning opening opening mode in 1R and 2R of winning A and the opening mode of big winning opening in 1R of winning B. FIG. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the large winning opening opening mode in 1R and 2R of winning A and the opening mode of big winning opening in 1R of winning B in the fourth embodiment.

Hit A receives the first command to open the large winning opening at timing t11, opens the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38), opens the V door 520 at the required timing, and Create an easy prize winning opportunity. Winning A receives the interval command at timing t12 and closes the big winning opening. As a result, the winner A opens the big winning opening for a period Ta (for example, 100 ms). In addition, hit A receives the interval command without waiting for the elapse of the period Ta when the required number of game balls (for example, nine) wins are detected before the elapse of the period Ta. Win A receives the command for the second time to open the large winning opening at timing t13, and opens the large winning opening. As a result, the hit A closes the big winning opening for a period Tb (for example, 2000 ms). It should be noted that the win A does not provide a prize winning opportunity to the specific area switch 460 after 2R. Win A receives the interval command at timing t14 and closes the big winning opening. As a result, the hit A opens the big winning opening for a period Tc (for example, 25000 ms). In addition, hit A receives the interval command without waiting for the elapse of the period Tc when the required number of game balls (for example, nine) has been won before the elapse of the period Tc.

In this way, the game machine 10 opens the big winning gate for the period Ta from the start of winning (1R) in the winning A, then closes the big winning gate (interval) for the period Tb, and opens the big winning gate for the period Tc. do

Win B receives the first command to open the big winning opening at timing t11, opens the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38), opens the V door 520 at the required timing, and opens the specific area switch 460. provide opportunities for winning prizes. The hit B closes the big winning opening at timing t12. As a result, the hit B opens the big winning opening for a period Ta (for example, 100 ms). Win B opens the big winning opening at timing t13. As a result, the hit B closes the big winning opening for a period Tb (for example, 2000 ms). Win B receives the interval command at timing t15 and closes the big winning opening. As a result, the winning B opens the big winning opening for a period Td (for example, 22900 (=25000-100-2000) ms). In addition, hit B receives an interval command without waiting for timing t15 when the required number of game balls (for example, nine) wins are detected from timing t11 to timing t15. It should be noted that the win B does not provide a prize winning opportunity to the specific area switch 460 after 2R.

In this way, in the winning B, the game machine 10 opens the large winning opening during the period Ta from the start of the winning (1R) (first opening of the 1R), then closes the large winning opening (waiting) during the period Tb, The opening of the big winning opening during the period Td (second opening of 1R) is performed.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can open the big winning opening mode from timing t11 to timing t14 of winning A (1R, interval (between 1R2R), and 2R), and from timing t11 to timing t15 of winning B (1R first open). , wait, and 1R second time opening) can be the same as the big winning opening mode.

For example, the gaming machine 10 makes the timing of opening the big winning opening and closing timing of the big winning opening the same for the 1R opening of the winning A and the opening of the 1R first time of the winning B. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes the timing of closing the big winning opening and the timing of opening the big winning opening the same for the interval between 1R and 2R of winning A and the 1R weight of winning B. Naturally, the interval time between 1R and 2R of win A and the 1R wait time of win B are the same.

In addition, the game machine 10 hides the round correspondence display from the timing t11 to the timing t13 after the occurrence of the winning A and the winning B, and displays the round correspondence display after the timing t13. The round correspondence display is a display corresponding to the number of rounds. The round correspondence display abstractly displays the number of rounds instead of specifically specifying them. The round correspondence display will be described later in detail.

Thereby, the game machine 10 can make it difficult to distinguish between the winning A and the winning B by comparing the opening of the big winning opening of the winning A and the opening of the big winning opening of the winning B. In addition, the game machine 10 does not perform V notification (high-probability state transition notice) at the time when the specific area switch 460 detects a game ball for both winning A and winning B. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult for the player to grasp the value of the win until the V winning effect or the V non-winning effect is performed (after the end of 2R).

Next, the relationship between the reception timing of the n-th command for opening the big prize hole and the display timing of the round correspondence display will be described with reference to FIG. 145 . FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart representing the reception timing of the n-th command for opening the big prize hole and the display timing of the round corresponding display in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 145(1) shows the relationship between the reception timing of the second command for opening the big winning opening in win A and the display timing of the round correspondence display. The gaming machine 10 receives the second command for opening the big winning opening for winning A at timing t13. When the winning in progress is winning A, the game machine 10 performs the round corresponding display with the reception of the command for the second time of opening the big winning opening as a trigger.

FIG. 145(2) shows the relationship between the reception timing of the first command for opening the big winning opening in win B and the display timing of the round corresponding display. The gaming machine 10 receives the first command for opening the big winning opening for the win B at timing t11. When the winning in progress is winning B, the game machine 10 performs a round correspondence display triggered by timing t13 when a set time (for example, 2100 ms) has passed since the reception of the first command for opening the big winning opening.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the round correspondence display for the win A and win B from the same timing t13.
Next, the display screen during winning (winning A and winning B) in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the fourth embodiment; FIG.

A display screen 1000 shown in FIG. 146(1) is a display screen in a fanfare state, and displays a common fanfare effect for winning A and winning B. FIG. A display screen 1000 includes a bonus name 1001, which is a winning name in the effect. A bonus name 1001 displays a winning name common to winning A and winning B (for example, "X bonus") in a large size on the screen.

A display screen 1002 shown in FIG. 146(2) is a display screen subsequent to the display screen 1000 in the fanfare state, and includes a batting direction guidance display 1003 . The batting direction guidance display 1003 guides the player that the batting direction is the right game area (right batting) by displaying a large rightward arrow on the screen.

The display screen 1004 shown in FIG. 146(3) is the display during the 1R opening (short opening) of the winning A and the following interval period, and the first opening (short opening) of the 1R of the winning B and the waiting period following this. is the screen. The display screen 1004 includes a bonus name 1005 , a batting direction guidance display 1006 , and a game explanation display 1007 . The bonus name 1005 displays a winning name common to winning A and winning B (for example, "X bonus"). The display screen 1004 displays a bonus name 1005 for confirmation in the corner of the screen smaller than the bonus name 1001 for publicity. The batting direction guidance display 1006 guides the player that the batting direction is the right game area. The display screen 1004 displays a batting direction guidance display 1006 for confirmation in a corner of the screen smaller than the batting direction guidance display 1003 for publicity. A game explanation display 1007 explains a mini-game for the V winning effect or the V non-winning effect. For example, the game explanation display 1007 displays as a message "Send balls to the attacker and fill the meter!". Note that the game explanation display 1007 may explain the mini-game using pictograms, still images, moving images, or the like.

A display screen 1008 shown in FIG. 146(4) is a display screen during the period after the 2R opening (long opening) of the winning A and the period after the second opening (long opening) of the 1R of the winning B. FIG. That is, the display screen 1008 is a display screen during execution of the mini-game described in the display screen 1004 (during bonus effect). The display screen 1008 includes a bonus name 1005 , a batting direction guide display 1006 , a round correspondence display 1009 , an effect display 1010 and a meter display 1011 .

A round correspondence display 1009 displays a symbol (for example, a star display) corresponding to a round. Display screen 1008 shows three symbols in round correspondence display 1009 to guide at least the number of remaining rounds currently presented and the current round. For example, hatched symbols correspond to ongoing rounds, and solid white symbols correspond to scheduled rounds. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can guide the progress of rounds without specifying the specific number of rounds. In addition, the game machine 10 can make it difficult to distinguish between the win A and the win B with different timings for starting the round corresponding display 1009 . In addition, the game machine 10 can make it difficult to distinguish between a win A and a win B having substantially different numbers of rounds.

A presentation display 1010 presents a mini-game by displaying characters, effects, and the like. A meter display 1011 includes a 16-step meter and a patrol lamp for informing success of the mini-game. The 16-step meter is turned off in the initial state, and a predetermined step lights up each time a prize is won in the big winning slot, and the mini-game is successful when all lights are lit.

A display screen 1012 shown in FIG. 147(1) is a display screen during execution of a mini game (during a bonus effect), and is a display screen following display screen 1008 . The display screen 1012 includes a bonus name 1005 , a batting direction guide display 1006 , a round correspondence display 1009 , an effect display 1010 and a meter display 1011 . A meter display 1011 on the display screen 1012 shows a state in which the mini-game is progressing, that is, 4 steps out of 16 steps are lit based on the winning of the big winning slot.

A display screen 1014 shown in FIG. 147(2) is a display screen when there is a V prize. A display screen 1014 is a display screen during the V winning effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1012 . The display screen 1014 includes a bonus name 1005 , a batting direction guide display 1006 , a round correspondence display 1009 , an effect display 1010 and a meter display 1011 . The round correspondence display 1009 on the display screen 1014 updates the hatched symbols to dashed white symbols, and updates one of the solid white symbols to a hatched symbol to guide the progress of the round. A meter display 1011 on the display screen 1014 indicates a state in which the mini-game is successful, that is, 16 steps out of 16 are lit based on the winning in the big winning slot, and the patrol lamp notifies the success of the mini-game.

A display screen 1016 shown in FIG. 147(3) is a display screen during the V winning effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1014 . The display screen 1016 includes a bonus name 1005 , a batting direction guide display 1006 , a round correspondence display 1009 , and a V pass notification display 1017 . The V passing notification display 1017 guides V passing (V winning). For example, the V passage notification display 1017 displays a pictogram "V". Note that the V-passing notification display 1017 may guide the V-passing by a message, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

A display screen 1018 shown in FIG. 147(4) is a display screen during the bonus effect after the V winning effect in the win B. FIG. In addition, even if there is a V winning effect, the win A shifts to the ending after the V winning effect, so there is no bonus effect after the V winning effect.

Display screen 1018 is a display screen following display screen 1016 . The display screen 1018 includes a bonus name 1005, a batting direction guide display 1006, a round correspondence display 1009, and an effect display 1010. The round correspondence display 1009 on the display screen 1018 guides the progress of the round by updating hatched symbols to dashed white symbols and updating one of the solid white symbols to hatched symbols.

The game machine 10 sets a common effect for winning A and winning B, thereby making it difficult to distinguish between winning A and winning B and setting a time lag in the notification regarding probability variation. It may include a big hit that does not set a time lag to. For example, the gaming machine 10 includes a hit C in which no time lag is set for notification regarding probability variation.

Here, the display screen during winning C on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the fourth embodiment; FIG.

A display screen 1020 shown in FIG. 148(1) is a display screen in a fanfare state, and displays a fanfare effect for winning C. The display screen 1020 shown in FIG. The display screen 1020 includes a bonus name 1021, which is a winning name in the effect. The bonus name 1021 displays the winning name of winning C (for example, "V bonus") in a large size on the screen.

A display screen 1022 shown in FIG. 148(2) is a display screen subsequent to the display screen 1020 in the fanfare state, and includes a batting direction guide display 1023 . The hitting direction guide display 1023 guides the player that the hitting direction is the right game area (right hitting) by displaying a large rightward arrow on the screen.

A display screen 1024 shown in FIG. 148(3) is a display screen during the 1R open period of winning A. FIG. The display screen 1024 includes a bonus name 1025 , a batting direction guidance display 1026 and a game explanation display 1027 . The bonus name 1025 displays the winning name of the winning C (for example, "V bonus"). The display screen 1024 displays a bonus name 1025 for confirmation in a corner smaller than the bonus name 1021 for publicity. The batting direction guidance display 1026 guides the player that the batting direction is the right game area. The display screen 1024 displays a batting direction guidance display 1026 for confirmation in a corner of the screen smaller than the batting direction guidance display 1023 for publicity. A game explanation display 1027 explains that it is time to aim for V (specific area switch 460). For example, game instruction display 1027 displays "Aim for V" as a message. Note that the game explanation display 1027 may explain the mini-game using pictograms, still images, moving images, or the like.

A display screen 1028 shown in FIG. 148(4) is a display screen following the display screen 1024 . The display screen 1028 includes a bonus name 1025 , a batting direction guidance display 1026 , a round correspondence display 1029 , and a V pass notification display 1027 . The round correspondence display 1029 guides the progress of the round in the same manner as the round correspondence display 1009 . The round correspondence display 1029 differs from the round correspondence display 1009 in that four symbols are displayed, but the number of symbols to be displayed may be changed according to the type of winning and the progress of the effect. The V passage notification display 1030 guides V passage (V winning) in the same manner as the V passage notification display 1017 .

Next, the correspondence between the round correspondence display and the round will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of correspondence between the round correspondence display and rounds according to the fourth embodiment.

The correspondence table shown in FIG. 149(1) shows an example of the correspondence relationship between the display mode of the three-symbol round correspondence display 1009 and the number of rounds of winning A and winning B. FIG. The display mode 1009a corresponds to 2R in a win A and 1R in a win B. FIG. In the display mode 1009a, three symbols are arranged in a vertical line, the first symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the second and third symbols are solid white, and there are two uncompleted rounds. indicates that The display mode 1009b corresponds to 3R in a win A and 2R in a win B. FIG. In the display mode 1009b, three symbols are arranged in a vertical line and the second symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the first symbol is displayed in dashed white to indicate that there is one completed round, The third symbol is solid white to indicate that there is one undigested round. The display mode 1009c corresponds to 4R in a win A and 3R in a win B. FIG. In the display mode 1009c, three symbols are arranged in a vertical line and the third symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the first and second symbols are indicated by broken white lines to indicate that there are two completed rounds. indicates

That is, the gaming machine 10 can change the number of corresponding rounds according to the type of win even if the corresponding round display is performed in the same display mode. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can display the round corresponding display for a predetermined number of rounds in a display mode corresponding to the winning type.

Note that the hit B may be displayed in the same manner as 1R, 2R, and 3R for 4R, 5R, and 6R. Also, the round corresponding display 1009 can be hidden for the round corresponding to the short opening.

The correspondence table shown in FIG. 149(2) shows an example of the correspondence relationship between the display mode of the four-symbol round correspondence display 1009 and the number of rounds of winning A and winning B. FIG. The display mode 1009d does not correspond to the win A, but corresponds to the win B to 1R. In the display mode 1009d, four symbols are arranged in a vertical line and the first symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round. Show that there are three. In the display mode 1009e, the hit A and the hit B both correspond to 2R. In the display mode 1009e, four symbols are arranged in a vertical line and the second symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the first symbol is indicated by a dashed white line to indicate that there is one digested round, The third and fourth symbols are shown in solid white to indicate that there are two undigested rounds. In the display mode 1009f, both hit A and hit B correspond to 3R. In the display mode 1009f, four symbols are arranged in a vertical line and the third symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the first and second symbols are indicated by dashed white to indicate that there are two completed rounds. , with the fourth symbol in solid white to indicate that there is one undigested round. In the display mode 1009g, both hit A and hit B correspond to 4R. In the display mode 1009g, four symbols are arranged in a vertical line, the fourth symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the first, second, and third symbols are indicated by broken white lines, and three completed rounds are displayed. show that there is

In other words, when the game machine 10 performs the round correspondence display in the same display mode, the number of corresponding rounds is the same regardless of the type of win. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can display a predetermined number of round corresponding displays in a common display mode for a plurality of winning types.

Note that the gaming machine 10 can hide the round correspondence display for a predetermined number of rounds for some winning types. For example, the round corresponding display corresponding to 1R of hit A is not displayed. The gaming machine 10 can hide the round corresponding display when the corresponding round is in a specific open mode (for example, short open).

Next, the unit conversion round number display for guiding the player of the cumulative number of rounds instead of not specifying the rounds will be described with reference to FIG. 150 . FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of correspondence between the number of rounds and the number of unit conversion rounds in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 150(1) shows a correspondence table between the actual number of rounds and the number of unit conversion rounds. The winning type ``winning A'' has the number of rounds (formal number of rounds) of ``9'', but the number of rounds of opening the large winning mouth short is ``6'' and the number of rounds of opening the big winning mouth long is ``3''. Therefore, the actual number of rounds (corresponding to the number of rounds for opening the big winning mouth) is "3". The gaming machine 10 guides the player to the number of unit conversion rounds corresponding to the actual number of rounds of "3" instead of guiding the player to the actual number of rounds of "3".

Similarly, the winning type “winning B” has the number of rounds (formal number of rounds) “9”, the number of rounds for short opening the big winning mouth is “3”, and the number of rounds for opening the big winning mouth long is “ 6", the actual number of rounds (corresponding to the number of rounds for opening the big winning mouthpiece) is "6". The gaming machine 10 guides the player to the number of unit conversion rounds "2 Gao" corresponding to the actual number of rounds "6" instead of guiding the player to the actual number of rounds "6".

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can evaluate the value of winnings in units different from the number of formal rounds and the number of actual rounds.
FIG. 150(2) shows a history table of unit conversion round number display displayed corresponding to a win. The history table includes a series of winning histories from the first to the fourth times. The first win is a win type "win B", and according to the correspondence table shown in FIG. In addition, in order to increase the winning value, the game machine 10 once displays the unit conversion round number display "1 Gao" and then displays the unit conversion round number display "2 Gao". Since the second win is a win type "win B", the gaming machine 10 accumulates the unit conversion round number display "2 Gao" before the win and displays the unit conversion round number display "3 Gao" and "4 Gao". indicate. The third win is the win type "win A", and according to the correspondence table shown in FIG. The game machine 10 accumulates the usual unit conversion round number display "4 Gao" and displays the unit conversion round number display "5 Gao". Since the fourth win is the win type "win B", the game machine 10 accumulates the unit conversion round number display "5 Gao" before the win and displays the unit conversion round number display "6 Gao".

This makes it easier for the gaming machine 10 to grasp the value of the number of rounds obtained by cumulative wins. Also, the game machine 10 makes it easy to grasp the value of each win that constitutes the accumulated win. For example, some conventional gaming machines accumulate the number of rounds or the number of prize balls that can be obtained and display them, but it is not easy to grasp the value obtained.

In addition, when displaying the number of rounds, if the number of formal rounds is displayed, it may confuse the player because it does not represent the value that can be obtained. It may confuse the player. If the formal number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are displayed in parallel, the player may be even more confused. In this regard, the display of the number of rounds converted into units is less likely to mislead the player, and can guide the winning value and winning progress in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the unit conversion round number display will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152. FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 5) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the fourth embodiment; FIG.

A display screen 1100 shown in FIG. 151(1) is a display screen during a bonus effect, and is a display screen common to winning A and winning B. FIG. The display screen 1100 includes a bonus name 1101 , a batting direction guide display 1102 , a round correspondence display 1103 , a unit conversion display 1104 and an effect display 1105 . The bonus name 1101 displays a winning name common to winning A and winning B (for example, "X bonus"). The hitting direction guide display 1102 guides the player that the hitting direction is the right game area. A round correspondence display 1103 displays a symbol (for example, a star display) corresponding to a round. The round correspondence display 1103 displays three symbols, indicates that the actual number of rounds "3" has been obtained, and one of the rounds is being executed. The gaming machine 10 does not need to clarify whether the winning type is winning A or winning B. A unit conversion display (unit conversion round number display) 1104 converts to a numerical value "1 (=3/3)" converted numerically by a 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance, corresponding to acquisition of the real number of rounds "3". "1 Gao" is displayed with the unit "Gao" attached. An effect display 1105 produces a win by using a character, an effect display, or the like.

A display screen 1106 shown in FIG. 151(2) is a display screen during a bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1100 . The round correspondence display 1103 additionally displays three symbols corresponding to the round. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not need to clarify whether the winning type is winning A or winning B, or whether the winning is continuous. For example, when the win type is win A, 6 symbols can be displayed by two consecutive wins A, and when the win type is win B, 6 symbols can be displayed by one win B. can be displayed. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not need to reset the round correspondence display for each winning when the winning continues. Further, the gaming machine 10 may reset the round correspondence display for each win or in a predetermined case when the wins are consecutive. The round correspondence display 1103 displays 6 symbols, indicates that 3 rounds have been completed, and the actual number of rounds "3" has been obtained, of which 1 round is being executed. The unit conversion display 1104 adds the conversion unit "gao" to the numerical value "2 (= 6/3)" obtained by converting the numerical value by the 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance, corresponding to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "3". to display "2 Gao".

A display screen 1108 shown in FIG. 151(3) is a display screen during the bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1106 . The round correspondence display 1103 additionally displays three symbols corresponding to the round. The round correspondence display 1103 displays 9 symbols, indicates that 6 rounds have been completed, and the actual number of rounds "3" has been obtained, of which 1 round is being executed. A unit conversion display 1104 shown on the display screen 1108 corresponds to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "3", and converts the numerical value "3 (= 9/3)" into a numerical value converted by a previously prepared 1/3 conversion formula. "3 Gao" is displayed by adding "Gao".

A display screen 1110 shown in FIG. 151(4) is another example of the display screen 1108 and is a display screen following the display screen 1106 . The round correspondence display 1103 additionally displays six symbols corresponding to the round. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can vary the number of symbols to be additionally displayed. For example, the gaming machine 10 can add 6 symbols at a time when winning B, or can add 6 symbols in two times of 3 each. Note that the gaming machine 10 may arbitrarily set the symbol addition unit and the number of symbol additions according to the winning type. The round correspondence display 1103 displays 12 symbols, indicates that 6 rounds have been completed, and the actual number of rounds "6" has been obtained, of which 1 round is being executed. A unit conversion display 1104 shown on the display screen 1110 corresponds to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "6", and the conversion unit is converted to a numerical value "4 (=12/3)" converted by a 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance. "4 Gao" is displayed by adding "Gao".

A display screen 1112 shown in FIG. 152(1) is a display screen during bonus effect, and is a display screen following display screen 1108 or display screen 1110 . In the round correspondence display 1103, after resetting the previously displayed symbols, three symbols are displayed corresponding to the round. The round correspondence display 1103 indicates that the actual number of rounds "3" has been obtained with three symbols, and indicates that one of the rounds is being executed. The unit conversion display 1104 adds the conversion unit "gao" to the numerical value "5 (=15/3)" obtained by converting the numerical value using the 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance, corresponding to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "3". to display "5 Gao".

A display screen 1114 shown in FIG. 152(2) is a display screen during the bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1112 . The round correspondence display 1103 additionally displays three symbols corresponding to the round. The round correspondence display 1103 displays 6 symbols, indicates that 3 rounds have been completed, and the actual number of rounds "3" has been obtained, of which 1 round is being executed. A unit conversion display 1104 shown on the display screen 1114 converts the numerical value "6 (= 18/3)" into a numerical value converted by a previously prepared 1/3 conversion formula corresponding to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "3". "6 Gao" is displayed by adding "Gao".

A display screen 1116 shown in FIG. 152(3) is a display screen during the bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1114 . In the round correspondence display 1103, after resetting the previously displayed symbols, three symbols are displayed corresponding to the round. The round correspondence display 1103 indicates that the actual number of rounds "3" has been obtained with three symbols, and indicates that one of the rounds is being executed. Note that the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily set a reset trigger for the previously displayed symbols. For example, the display screen 1112 is reset when 12 symbols are displayed, but the display screen 1116 is reset when 6 symbols are displayed. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the reset timing of the previously displayed symbols variable, thereby making the player more interested in the reset timing of the symbols. For example, the gaming machine 10 may produce a feeling of anticipation according to the number of symbols being displayed, or give a privilege production (addition of audible music, addition of selectable characters, etc.). . The unit conversion display 1104 adds the conversion unit "gao" to the numerical value "7 (=21/3)" converted numerically by the 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance, corresponding to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "3". to display "7 Gao". Note that the game machine 10 is designed to produce a feeling of anticipation according to the size of the unit conversion display being displayed, or to give a privilege production (addition of audible music, addition of selectable characters, etc.). may

Here, a modified example of the unit conversion display (modified example 1 of the fourth embodiment) will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 156. FIG. The unit conversion display is not limited to the number of rounds, but the number of prize balls, the number of prizes, the number of outs, the operating time, the number of fluctuations, the number of reach, the number of hits, etc. Any object that can be measured in size can be converted. can do.

As an example, unit conversion of the number of winning balls will be described. First, the model specification commands of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of a model-specification-related command list according to Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.

The game control device 100 transmits a model specification system command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A. The effect control device 300 receives a model specification system command and performs required number-of-prize-balls integration processing. In addition, the production control device 300 includes the model specification system command in the processing range of the one-shot system command process (see FIG. 104) in step D62 of the received command analysis process, and can execute the process corresponding to the received model specification system command. .

The model-specification command (received command) includes MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte).
The model specification system commands include a large winning opening count command, a starting winning opening winning command, a general electric winning opening command, and a general winning opening winning command. The large winning opening count command is a command for the game control device 100 to notify the effect control device 300 of the winning to the special variable winning device 38 . The big winning mouth count command is designated by MODE "A7H" and ACTION "08H". ACTION "08H" in the big winning opening count command indicates the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the special variable winning device 38, for example eight. The starting winning opening winning command is a command for the game control device 100 to notify the effect control device 300 of winning to the starting winning opening 36 . The start winning opening winning command is specified by MODE "A8H" and ACTION "04H". ACTION "04H" in the starting winning opening winning command indicates the number of winning balls corresponding to winning to the starting winning opening 36, for example four. General electrical winning command is a command that the game control device 100 notifies the production control device 300 of winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessory). The general electric prize command is designated by MODE "A9H" and ACTION "01H". ACTION "01H" in the general electric prize winning command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize winning to the starting prize winning port 36, for example, one. The general winning opening winning command is a command for the game control device 100 to notify the effect control device 300 of winning to the general winning opening 35 . General winning mouth winning command is specified by MODE "AAH" and ACTION "03H". ACTION "03H" in the general prize winning command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize winning to the general prize winning port 35, and is, for example, three.

Next, the display of the number of winning balls converted into units for guiding the player about the estimated number of winning balls instead of not specifying the number of accumulated winning balls will be described with reference to FIG. 154 . FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the number of prize balls and the number of unit conversion prize balls in Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.

The production control device 300 generates a special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), a starting winning opening 36 ( starting winning opening), normal variable winning device 37 (universal electricity), and general winning opening 35 (general winning opening), the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning can be acquired. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 154 (1), the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. It is possible to acquire the number of prize balls "1" corresponding to winning in the general electric power and the number of prize balls "3" corresponding to winning in the general winning opening.

Thereby, the performance control device 300 can calculate the cumulative number of prize balls according to the history of prize balls, perform required unit conversion, and display the number of converted prize balls, which is the number of prize balls after unit conversion. It should be noted that the effect control device 300 rounds down the first digit of the cumulative number of prize balls and converts it into a value whose unit is "pt".

FIG. 154(2) shows a corresponding history table of award ball history and unit conversion award ball number display. The correspondence history table shows the number of prize balls "1", "3", "4", "8", "8", "8", "8", "3", "8", "8" in chronological order. ” indicates that a prize ball has been generated. Based on the number of prize balls obtained in chronological order, the effect control device 300 sets the number of accumulated prize balls in chronological order as the accumulated number of prize balls for a predetermined period, We get '24', '32', '40', '43', '51' and '59'. The performance control device 300 truncates the first digit of the cumulative number of prize balls, and displays the number of unit converted prize balls in chronological order "0pt", "0pt", "0pt", "10pt", "20pt", "30pt". , "40pt", "40pt", "50pt", "50pt".

According to this, the gaming machine 10 can abstractly guide the accumulated number of awarded balls to the player without clearly indicating the concrete accumulated number of awarded balls to the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can intuitively inform a player who takes a long time to acquire information or interpret information because the numerical value is too specific.

Note that the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily perform required unit conversions, including selection of conversion targets and conversion formulas. In addition, although the game machine 10 performs unit conversion on the game history, the unit conversion may be performed on a planned game result such as the number of winning balls expected to be won. In addition, the game machine 10 can arbitrarily set the accumulation period, for example, 1 round, 1 per time, 10 minutes, etc., and can reset the accumulated value by an event trigger or a timer trigger.

Next, the display of the number of winning balls converted into units will be described with reference to FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 1 of the fourth embodiment; FIG.
A display screen 1120 shown in FIG. 155(1) is a display screen at the beginning of the bonus presentation. The display screen 1120 includes a bonus name 1121 , a batting direction guide display 1122 and an expected value display 1123 . The bonus name 1121 displays the winning name (for example, "X bonus") in terms of performance. The hitting direction guidance display 1122 guides the player that the hitting direction is the right game area. The expected winning value display 1123 displays the expected winning value (for example, , “240pt”).

A display screen 1124 shown in FIG. 155(2) is a display screen during the bonus effect and is a display screen following the display screen 1120 . The display screen 1124 includes a bonus name 1121 , a batting direction guidance display 1122 and an acquired value display 1125 . Acquired value display 1125 displays the acquired value (for example, "240pt") by adding a predetermined unit (for example, "pt") to the unit-converted value of the number of award balls won during the win (the number of won award balls). show. When the number of prize balls is obtained in excess of the number of prize balls to be obtained, the gaming machine 10 may stop updating the number of prize balls to be obtained with the number of prize balls to be obtained as an upper limit. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may calculate the number of winning prize balls only for winnings in the winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) for which the number of expected winning balls is calculated.

A display screen 1126 shown in FIG. 155(3) is another example of the display screen 1124 and is a display screen following the display screen 1120 . The display screen 1126 includes a bonus name 1121 , a batting direction guidance display 1122 and an acquired value display 1127 . Acquired value display 1127 displays the acquired value (eg, "250pt") by adding a predetermined unit (eg, "pt") to the unit-converted value of the number of award balls acquired during the win (the number of won award balls). show. When the number of prize balls is obtained in excess of the expected number of prize balls to be obtained, the gaming machine 10 allows the number of prize balls to be obtained to exceed the expected number of prize balls to be obtained, and updates the number of obtained prize balls. In addition, the gaming machine 10 calculates the number of prize balls to be won (for example, winning to a general prize opening), not limited to the winning to the winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) for which the expected number of winning winning balls is calculated. It may be a target.

Although the gaming machine 10 converts the accumulated number of prize balls into units, the cumulative value may be calculated after converting the number of prize balls in advance. First, unit-converted prize-ball number display for converting the number of prize-balls into units and calculating the cumulative value of the converted values will be described with reference to FIG. 156 . FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of correspondence between the number of prize balls and the number of accumulated points in Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.

The production control device 300 generates a special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), a starting winning opening 36 ( starting winning opening), normal variable winning device 37 (universal electricity), and general winning opening 35 (general winning opening), the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning can be obtained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 156 (1), the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. It is possible to acquire the number of prize balls "1" corresponding to winning in the general electric power and the number of prize balls "3" corresponding to winning in the general winning opening.

The effect control device 300 performs required unit conversion on the acquired number of prize balls. In addition, the effect control device 300 multiplies the number of prize balls by 10 and converts it into a value whose unit is "pt". According to this, the number of prize balls for the big prize opening is set to "80pt" (the number of prize balls converted into units), the number of start prize balls is set to "40pt", the number of normal electric prize balls is set to "10pt", And the number of general prize winning balls can be converted into points "30pt".

FIG. 156(2) shows a correspondence history table of prize ball history and accumulated points. The correspondence history table shows the number of prize balls "1", "3", "4", "8", "8", "8", "8", "3", "8", "8" in chronological order. ” indicates that a prize ball has been generated. Based on the points after the unit conversion of the number of prize balls obtained in chronological order, the production control device 300 sets the accumulated point numbers "10pt", "40pt", "80pt", "160pt", "240pt", "320pt", "400pt", "430pt", "510pt" and "590pt" are obtained.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player about abstract accumulated points without clearly indicating the specific accumulated number of winning balls to the player. As a result, the game machine 10 can make the image given by the concrete numerical value an abstract image and make it known to the player.

Note that the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily perform required unit conversions, including selection of conversion targets and conversion formulas. In addition, although the game machine 10 performs unit conversion on the game history, the unit conversion may be performed on a planned game result such as the number of winning balls expected to be won. In addition, the game machine 10 can arbitrarily set the accumulation period, for example, 1 round, 1 per time, 10 minutes, etc., and can reset the accumulated value by an event trigger or a timer trigger.

Again, it returns to description of 4th Embodiment. The V winning effect and the V non-winning effect have been briefly described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 148, but will be described again in detail with reference to FIGS.

First, the winning type will be described again with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of a per-win performance table including presence/absence of the V notification game according to the fourth embodiment. The game machine 10 includes "win A", "win B", "win C" and "win D" in the win types.

Win A has no probability variation and a V notification game. Win B has probability variation and V notification game. Win C has no probability variation and no V notification game. Win D has probability variation and no V notification game. In addition, for a win with a V notification game (win A and win B), an effect with a V notification game (mini game) is performed for a V winning effect or a V non-winning effect. A win with a V-informing game is notified of probability variation through the V-informing game, and a winning without a V-informing game (win C and win D) is notified of probability variation without going through the V-informing game.

Here, the notification of probability fluctuation for each hit will be described with reference to FIG. 158 . FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of probability variation notification for each hit according to the fourth embodiment.
The game flow shown in FIG. 158(1) is the game flow of winning A and winning B. FIG. Winning A and winning B perform a V notification game within the winning performance. Hit A and hit B inform the player of the success or failure of V winning (game ball detection by specific area switch 460) without guiding the player to aim at "V (specific area)" (V aim non-guidance). do. That is, the gaming machine 10 notifies V winning success (V winning success notification) when there is V winning in winning A and winning B, and notifies V winning failure when V winning does not occur (V winning failure report). The game machine 10 determines the V notification game according to the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 460, so that V winning success notification or V winning failure notification can be performed in accordance with the result of the V notification game. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 provides the presentation time of the V announcing game, so that the V winning success notification or the V winning failure notification is delayed from the game ball detection timing of the specific area switch 460 .

The game flow shown in FIG. 158(2) is the winning C game flow. Win C does not perform a V notification game in the win effect, nor does it guide the player to aim for "V". The game machine 10 notifies V winning success when there is V winning in win C, but does not dare to notify V winning failure when there is no V winning because V aim is not guided. (V winning failure non-notification).

The game flow shown in FIG. 158(3) is a winning D game flow. A win D guides the player to aim for a "V" (V aim guide) without performing a V announcing game in the win performance. That is, the gaming machine 10 notifies V winning success when there is a V winning in the win D, and notifies V winning failure when there is no V winning. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily need to report the failure of winning the V prize in the winning D. FIG.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 notifies whether or not a high-probability state occurs with a delay from the game ball detection timing of the specific area switch 460 (hit A and hit B), and the game ball detection of the specific area switch 460. It is possible to set the hits (hit C and hit D) for notifying the occurrence of the high-probability state at the point in time.

Next, the game flow of the V notification game will be explained using FIG. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of the game flow of the V notification game of the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 provides game guidance in the V notification game (F100). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 notifies the player of the V notification game. Moreover, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the player's interest in the special variable winning device 38 and the open state of the V door 520 by directing the player's interest in the game guidance.

The gaming machine 10 performs a first game effect as a V notification game (F101). The first game effect corresponds to the mini-game described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 148. FIG. The gaming machine 10 performs the first game success effect in part when there is a V winning (F102), and then notifies the success of the V winning (F103).

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 performs the first game failure effect for the remaining part when there is a V win and when there is no V win (F104). The gaming machine 10 notifies V winning failure in some cases when there is no V winning (F105).

The gaming machine 10 performs a second game effect, which is a first game failure revival effect, with the remaining part when there is a V prize and the remaining part when there is no V prize (F106). The second game effect is a game effect different from the first game effect, for example, a game effect requiring the player to press the push button 25 .

The gaming machine 10 performs a second game success effect (F107) when there is a V win and when a pressing operation of the push button 25 is detected within a predetermined time (no time-out), and then notifies a V win success. Do (F103).

On the other hand, when the gaming machine 10 does not win a V prize and detects a pressing operation of the push button 25 within a predetermined time (non-timeout), the gaming machine 10 performs a second game failure effect (F108), and then fails to win a V prize. Notification is made (F105).

In addition, when the game machine 10 does not detect the pressing operation of the push button 25 within a predetermined time (timeout), the game machine 10 performs a timeout effect (F109). After the time-out effect, the gaming machine 10 notifies V winning success when there is a V winning (F103), and notifies V winning failure when there is no V winning (F105).

Next, the progress of the V notification game for winning B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of the progress of the V annunciation game in winning B according to the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 enters a fanfare state (FAN) when a win B occurs, and performs a fanfare effect. The game machine 10 advances from the fanfare state to 1R (round), releases the V blockage, that is, opens the V door 520, and enables the specific area switch 460 to detect game balls. The gaming machine 10 provides game guidance at 1R and an interval (INT) following 1R. The gaming machine 10 performs the first game effect in 2R and the interval following 2R. The gaming machine 10 performs the first game success effect or the first game failure effect at the 3R and the interval following the 3R. The gaming machine 10 notifies V prize success from 4R to 6R when the first game success effect is performed in 3R and the interval following 3R.

The gaming machine 10 performs V prize failure notification from 4R to 6R when the first game failure effect is performed in the 3R and the interval following the 3R and when the second game effect is not performed. When the game machine 10 performs the first game failure effect in 3R and the interval following 3R and performs the second game effect, it performs the second game effect in 4R and the interval following 4R.

When the pressing operation of the push button 25 is detected within a predetermined time in the second game effect, the gaming machine 10 continues the second game success effect or the second game failure effect until the end of the interval following 4R depending on the presence or absence of the V prize. Do. The game machine 10 notifies V prize success from 5R to 6R when the second game success performance is performed, and notifies V prize failure from 5R to 6R when the second game failure performance is performed.

When the game machine 10 does not detect the pressing operation of the push button 25 within a predetermined time in the second game effect, the timeout effect is performed. After performing the time-out effect, the game machine 10 performs V winning success notification or V winning failure notification according to the presence or absence of V winning from 5R to 6R.

After the V winning success notification or the V winning failure notification is performed, the game machine 10 performs an ending effect including an ending (END) state after the interval following 6R.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set a predetermined time lag for the success or failure of the V winning (game ball detection by the specific area switch 460), and perform V winning success notification or V winning failure notification. The gaming machine 10 can set such a time lag as the predetermined period after the V winning. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag based on the detection of the winning of a large winning opening (for example, winning of a large winning opening in a mini game) after the V winning timing. Also, the gaming machine 10 can set the timing from the V winning timing to the detection of the player's operation (for example, pressing the push button 25) as a time lag. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by performing V winning success notification or V winning failure notification after the end of a round with V winning timing. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by performing V winning success notification or V winning failure notification after the round following the round with the V winning timing. Moreover, the gaming machine 10 can set a multistage time lag by setting two or more notification opportunities (for example, the first game effect and the second game effect) after the V winning timing.

Next, the display screen during the V notification game on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 163. FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 6) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 7) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 8) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the fourth embodiment; FIG.

The display screen during the V notification game will be described in correspondence with the game flow of the V notification game (see FIG. 159).
A display screen 1130 shown in FIG. 161(1) is a display screen for performing game guidance (F100) in the V notification game. Display screen 1130 includes game description display 1132 . The game explanation display 1132 explains the mini-game for the V winning effect or the V non-winning effect, and informs the player of the V notification game (first game). For example, the game explanation display 1132 displays as a message "Send balls to the attacker and fill the meter!".

A display screen 1134 shown in FIG. 161(2) is a display screen for performing the first game effect (F101) in the V notification game. Display screen 1134 includes meter display 1136 and event display 1137 . A meter display 1136 includes a 16-step meter and a patrol lamp for informing success of the mini-game. The 16-step meter is turned off in the initial state, and a predetermined step lights up each time a prize is won in the big winning slot, and the mini-game is successful when all lights are lit. The event display 1137 presents an event corresponding to winning a prize in the big prize opening. For example, the event display 1137 emits a light beam from the direction of the special variable prize winning device 38 to the direction of the meter display 1136 each time a prize is won in the big prize opening, and lights up the meter in predetermined steps as shown in the display screen 1138 shown in FIG. 161 (3). .

A display screen 1140 shown in FIG. 161(4) is a display screen for performing the first game success effect (F102) in the V notification game. Display screen 1140 includes meter display 1136 and success effect display 1141 . In the meter display 1136, all 16-step meters are lit. The success effect display 1141 informs the success of the mini-game (first game) by means of a patrol lamp display mode (for example, flash lighting).

A display screen 1142 shown in FIG. 162(1) is a display screen for notifying V winning success (F103) in the V announcing game. The display screen 1142 includes a V winning success notification display 1143 . The V prize success notification display 1143 displays a pictogram "V" to notify the success of the V prize. Note that the V winning success notification display 1143 may notify the V winning success by a message, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

A display screen 1144 shown in FIG. 162(2) is a display screen for performing the first game failure effect (F104) in the V notification game. Display screen 1144 includes meter display 1136 and failure effect display 1145 . The meter display 1136 turns off at least part of the 16-step meter. The failure effect display 1145 notifies the failure of the mini game by the display mode of the patrol lamp (for example, failure).

A display screen 1146 shown in FIG. 162(3) is a display screen for performing a V prize failure notification (F105) in the V notification game. The display screen 1146 includes a V winning failure notification display 1147 . The V winning failure notification display 1147 displays a message “sorry” to notify that the V winning has failed. Note that the V winning failure notification display 1147 may be a pictogram, a still image, a moving image, or the like that notifies the V winning failure.

A display screen 1148 shown in FIG. 162(4) is a display screen for performing the second game effect (F106) in the V notification game. Display screen 1148 includes game explanation display 1149 and time-up display 1150 . The game explanation display 1149 explains the player's operation for the V winning effect or the V non-winning effect, and informs the player of the V notification game (second game). For example, the second game is a game in which the success or failure of winning a V prize is reported by detecting the pressing operation of the push button 25 within a predetermined period of time. The game explanation display 1149 displays an image of the push button 25 corresponding to the player operation unit as a pictogram with the message "Press!". A time-up display 1150 displays a predetermined time (time-up time) for detecting pressing operation of the push button 25 as a gauge.

A display screen 1152 shown in FIG. 163(1) is a display screen for carrying out a second game success effect (F107) in the V notification game. Display screen 1152 includes success effect display 1153 . The success effect display 1153 notifies success of the mini-game (second game) by flashing the image of the push button 25 .

A display screen 1154 shown in FIG. 163(2) is a display screen for performing a second game failure effect (F108) in the V notification game. Display screen 1154 includes failure effect display 1155 . The failure effect display 1155 notifies failure of the mini-game (second game) by causing the image of the push button 25 to lose saturation and brightness.

A display screen 1156 shown in FIG. 163(3) is a display screen for performing a timeout effect (F109) in the V notification game. Display screen 1156 includes timeout effect display 1157 . A time-out effect display 1157 notifies a mini-game (second game) time-out by causing the image of the push button 25 to lose saturation and brightness.

Next, modification 2 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166. FIG. The gaming machine of Modified Example 2 of the fourth embodiment includes a win X in which the release timing of the V blockage is not set to the first round (1R) but to an intermediate round (4R).

First, the progress of the V notification game for winning X will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of the progress of the V annunciation game for winning X in Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 enters a fanfare state (FAN) due to the occurrence of hit X, and performs a fanfare effect. The gaming machine 10 advances from the fanfare state to 1R (round), and provides game guidance from 1R to an interval (INT) following 3R. The gaming machine 10 performs a game effect 1 at 4R and the interval following 4R. Also, in 4R, the gaming machine 10 releases the V blockage, that is, opens the V door 520, and enables the specific area switch 460 to detect the game ball.

After 5R, the gaming machine 10 performs a V winning failure notification, a game 1 success effect, or a game effect 2. - 特許庁The game machine 10 sets the notification period from 5R to 9R when performing the V winning failure notification after the game effect 1.例文帳に追加When the gaming machine 10 performs the game 1 success effect or the game effect 2, the effect period is the interval following 5R and 5R. When the game 1 success effect is performed, the gaming machine 10 sets the notification period of the V winning success notification from 6R to 9R.

When the game effect 2 is performed, the gaming machine 10 performs a V winning failure notification, a game 2 success effect, or a game effect 3 after 6R. The game machine 10 sets the notification period from 6R to 9R when performing the V winning failure notification after the game effect 2. - 特許庁When the gaming machine 10 performs the game 2 success effect or the game effect 3, the effect period is set to 6R and the interval following 6R. When the game 2 success effect is performed, the gaming machine 10 sets the notification period of the V prize success notification to 7R to 9R.

When the game effect 3 is performed, the gaming machine 10 performs the game 3 success effect at 7R and the interval following 7R. That is, the game effect 3 is a V winning success confirmation effect in which there is no failure and there is only success. The game machine 10 sets the notification period of the V winning success notification to 8R to 9R when the game 3 success effect is performed.

The game machine 10 performs an ending effect in an ending (END) state after performing V winning success notification or V winning failure notification.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set a predetermined time lag for the success or failure of the V winning (game ball detection by the specific area switch 460), and perform V winning success notification or V winning failure notification. The gaming machine 10 can set such a time lag as the predetermined period after the V winning. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by performing V winning success notification or V winning failure notification after the end of a round with V winning timing. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by performing V winning success notification or V winning failure notification after the round following the round with the V winning timing. Also, the gaming machine 10 can set a multistage time lag by setting two or more notification opportunities (for example, game presentation 1, game presentation 2, and game presentation 3) after the V winning timing.

Next, the display screen during the V notification game on the display device 41 of Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 2 of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by a display device according to Modification 2 of Embodiment 4. FIG.

A display screen 1160 shown in FIG. 165(1) is a display screen for providing game guidance in the V notification game. Display screen 1160 includes game description display 1162 . The game explanation display 1162 explains the game for the V winning effect or the V non-winning effect, and informs the contents of the effect. For example, the game explanation display 1162 displays "Win the game!" as a message.

A display screen 1164 shown in FIG. 165(2) is a display screen for performing a game effect (common to the effect games 1, 2 and 3) in the V notification game. Display screen 1164 includes event display 1168 . The event display 1168 presents a match between two characters 1168a and 1168b. Note that the character 1168a corresponds to the main character, and the character 1168b corresponds to the enemy character. Although the game effects are common to the effect games 1, 2 and 3, they may be different.

A display screen 1170 shown in FIG. 165(3) is a display screen for carrying out a game success effect (common to the effect games 1, 2 and 3) in the V notification game. Display screen 1170 includes game success indicator 1171 . Game success display 1171 shows how character 1168a wins over character 1168b. Although the game success effect is common to the effect games 1, 2 and 3, it may be different.

A display screen 1172 shown in FIG. 165(4) is a display screen for reporting success of V winning in the V notification game. The display screen 1172 includes a V winning success notification display 1173 . The V prize success notification display 1173 displays a pictogram "V" to notify the success of the V prize. Note that the V winning success notification display 1173 may notify the V winning success by means of a message, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

A display screen 1174 shown in FIG. 166(1) is a display screen for performing a game failure effect (common to the effect games 1 and 2) in the V notification game. Display screen 1174 includes game failure indication 1175 . Game failure display 1175 shows how character 1168a is defeated by character 1168b. Although the game failure effect is common to the effect games 1 and 2, it may be different.

A display screen 1176 shown in FIG. 166(2) is a display screen for performing notification of V winning failure in the V notification game. The display screen 1176 includes a V winning failure notification display 1177 . The V winning failure notification display 1177 displays a message "sorry" to notify failure of the V winning. Note that the V winning failure notification display 1177 may be a pictogram, a still image, a moving image, or the like to notify the V winning failure.

A display screen 1178 shown in FIG. 166(3) is a display screen for performing a game effect (effect game 2) in the V notification game. Display screen 1178 includes event display 1179 . The event display 1179 presents the second game between the two characters 1168a and 1168b.

A display screen 1180 shown in FIG. 166(4) is a display screen for performing a game effect (effect game 3) in the V notification game. Display screen 1180 includes event display 1181 . The event display 1181 presents the third match between the two characters 1168a and 1168b.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes winning means (special variable winning device 38), detection means (specific area switch 460), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The prize winning means includes a first state (short open) in which the game ball is easily accepted in the first period, a second state (long open) in which the game ball is easily accepted in the second period longer than the first period (long open), and a game A third state (occluded), which makes balls difficult to accept, can be converted. The detection means can detect the game ball accepted by the winning means. The control means is a first special game state (hit A) that can transition to a specific game state (probability fluctuation (high probability state)) when the detection means detects a game ball in the first state, or in the second state A second special game state (hit B) capable of transitioning to a specific game state when the detecting means detects a game ball can be generated, and from the occurrence of the first special game state in the first special game state to the second The first elapsed period until conversion to the state and the second elapsed period from the occurrence of the second special game state in the second special game state to the conversion to the second state are the same (Ta + Tb (Fig. 144) ).

(2) The game machine 10 of (1) is provided with a display effect means (display device 41) that performs display effect. The control means waits for the first elapsed period and the second elapsed period to elapse, and performs a notification display regarding the round (round corresponding display 1009) by the display effect means.

(3) The control means of (1) or (2) sets the first state in one round (1R) in the first special game state, and sets the third state (interval) in two rounds (2R). The second state is set, and the second state is set between the first state and the third state (wait) in one round in the second special game state.

(4) The gaming machine 10 includes winning means (special variable winning device 38), detection means (specific area switch 460), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The winning means can switch between a first state (open) that makes it easy to accept game balls and a second state (closed) that makes it difficult to accept game balls. The detection means can detect the game ball received by the winning means at a predetermined timing. The control means is a first special game state that can transition to a specific game state when the detection means detects a game ball in the first state, or a specific game state when the detection means detects a game ball in the second state. A second special game state capable of transitioning to (probability fluctuation (high probability state)) can be generated, and the transition notification to the specific game state based on the detection result of the game ball by the detection means is delayed with respect to a predetermined timing. (For example, the first game effect) is set.

(5) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display information (round corresponding display) in relation to a variable display game that variably displays symbols. The control means can derive a first win (win A) or a second win (win B) in the variable display game, corresponding to the number of rounds of the first win or the number of rounds of the second win. When displaying the corresponding round display on the display means, the number of rounds corresponding to one display form (for example, display form 1009a) of the round corresponding displays is the first win (display form 1009a corresponds to 2R) and the second 2 hit (display mode 1009a corresponds to 1R).

(6) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display information related to a variable display game that variably displays symbols. The control means can derive a first win (win B) or a second win (win A) in the variable display game, corresponding to the number of rounds of the first win or the number of rounds of the second win. When the round corresponding display (for example, display mode 1009d) is displayed on the display means, the display mode corresponding to the predetermined number of rounds among the round corresponding displays is displayed in the first win (display mode 1009d corresponds to 1R). However, the second hit is not displayed (the display mode 1009d does not correspond to 1R).

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes winning means (special variable winning device 38), detection means (specific area switch 460), guidance means (display device 41), control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300 ) and including. The winning means can switch between a first state (open) that makes it easy to accept game balls and a second state (closed) that makes it difficult to accept game balls. The detection means can detect the game ball received by the winning means at a predetermined timing (for example, V blockage release). The guidance means performs game guidance (game explanation display 1027) according to a predetermined timing. The control means is capable of deriving the first win or the second win in the variable display game, and performs game guidance for either the first win or the second win (wins A, B, C). : V aim non-guidance, hit D: V aim guidance), when the detection means detects a game ball, regardless of the presence or absence of game guidance, the detection of the game ball is notified (V prize success notification) and a specific game state ( Transition to probability fluctuation (high probability state)).

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display information related to a variable display game that variably displays symbols. The control means controls first numerical information (eg, 16 (rounds), 6 (rounds), 10 (pieces), etc.) is converted to second numerical information (for example, 4 (round), 2 (round), 100 (pieces), etc.), and the second numerical information and a second unit different from the first unit (for example, "kyun", "gao", "pt", etc.) are displayed on the display means display.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be explained. The gaming machine 10 shown in the fifth embodiment has a pattern composed of two or more identification elements, and can selectively display the identification elements in the course of variation. First, the decorative design (decorative design) of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing an example of the decorative design of the fifth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 can selectively display a decorative pattern A, a decorative pattern B, and a decorative pattern C as decorative patterns. The decorative design A is a decorative design that is mainly used, and the decorative design B and the decorative design C are secondary decorative designs. For example, the decorative symbol A is used during the variable display effect without using the movie, and the decorative symbols B and C are used during the variable display effect using the movie.

Decorative pattern A includes patterns 1201 , 1202 , 1203 , 1204 , and 1205 . The patterns 1201, 1202, 1203, 1204, and 1205 are distinguishable from other patterns due to their different display modes.

A pattern 1201 is a pattern that displays the number "1". The pattern 1201 is composed of a graphic element 1201a that is identifiable as a pattern by a figure (for example, a character such as a boy), a number element 1201b that is identifiable as a pattern by the number "1", and a character "Taro" as a pattern. and a character element 1201c having the identification of That is, the graphic element 1201a, the numeric element 1201b, and the character element 1201c are identification elements of the pattern 1201, respectively.

A pattern 1202 is a pattern that displays the number "2". The pattern 1202 is composed of a graphic element 1202a that is identifiable as a pattern by a figure (for example, a character like a girl), a number element 1202b that is identifiable as a pattern by the number "2", and a character "Hanako" as a pattern. and a character element 1202c having the identity of That is, the graphic element 1202a, the numeric element 1202b, and the character element 1202c are identification elements of the design 1202, respectively.

A pattern 1203 is a pattern that displays the number "3". The pattern 1203 is composed of a graphic element 1203a that is identifiable as a pattern by a graphic (for example, a character like a tiger), a numeral element 1203b that is identifiable as a pattern by the number "3", and a character "tiger" as a pattern. and a character element 1203c having the identity of That is, the graphic element 1203a, the numeric element 1203b, and the character element 1203c are identification elements of the design 1203, respectively.

A design 1204 is a design that displays the number "4". The pattern 1204 is composed of a graphic element 1204a that is identifiable as a pattern by a figure (for example, a character such as a lion), a numeral element 1204b that is identifiable as a pattern by the number "4", and a character "lion" as a pattern. and a character element 1204c having the identity of That is, the graphic element 1204a, the number element 1204b, and the character element 1204c are identification elements of the design 1204, respectively.

A pattern 1205 is a pattern that displays the number "5". The pattern 1205 is composed of a graphic element 1205a that is identifiable as a pattern by a graphic (for example, a character such as a rocket), a numeral element 1205b that is identifiable as a pattern by the number "5", and a character "rocket" as a pattern. and a character element 1205c having the identity of That is, the graphic element 1205a, the numeric element 1205b, and the character element 1205c are identification elements of the pattern 1205, respectively.

The decorative design B is a design having the same distinguishing power as the numerical elements in the decorative design A, and is similar in shape to the numerical elements in the decorative design A, for example. The decorative pattern B includes patterns 1211, 1212, 1213, 1214, and 1215. The patterns 1211, 1212, 1213, 1214, and 1215 are distinguishable from other patterns due to their different display modes.

The decorative design C is a design having the same distinguishing power as the character elements in the decorative design A, and is similar in shape to the character elements in the decorative design A, for example. The decorative pattern C includes patterns 1221, 1222, 1223, 1224, and 1225. The patterns 1221, 1222, 1223, 1224, and 1225 are distinguishable from other patterns due to their different display modes.

The gaming machine 10 can simultaneously or exclusively use the decorative pattern A, the decorative pattern B, and the decorative pattern C according to the display effect.
Next, a typical display mode during variation in the decorative pattern A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during variation in the decorative pattern A of the fifth embodiment.

The display mode during variation in the decorative pattern A will be described using the pattern 1201 as a representative. Note that the symbols 1202, 1203, 1204, and 1205 are the same as the symbol 1201, so description thereof will be omitted.

The pattern 1201 displays all of the graphic element 1201a, the numeric element 1201b and the character element 1201c when the pattern is stopped (P1). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can sufficiently exhibit the effect of the design 1201 .

The pattern 1201 hides the graphic element 1201a and the character element 1201c and displays the numeric element 1201b at the start of fluctuation (P2). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can simplify the display content and improve the identification power of the pattern 1201 that starts to fluctuate.

It should be noted that the design 1201 can improve the distinguishability of the numeric element 1201b by displaying the numeric element 1201b in a larger size than when it was displayed together with the graphic element 1201a.

The pattern 1201 hides the graphic element 1201a and the character element 1201c and transparently displays the numeric element 1201b during the movement (P3). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can sufficiently exhibit the effects of backgrounds, movies, characters, and the like.

The pattern 1201 hides the graphic element 1201a and the character element 1201c and displays the numeric element 1201b before the fluctuation stops (P4). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can simplify the display content, and can enhance the identification power of the symbol 1201 before the fluctuation is stopped.

As a first step before stopping the fluctuation of the pattern 1201, the graphic element 1201a and the numeric element 1201b are hidden, and the character element 1201c is displayed (P5). That is, the pattern 1201 switches the display object from the numeric element 1201b to the character element 1201c. As a result, the game machine 10 can multilaterally enhance the identification power of the symbol 1201 before the stoppage of fluctuation. Also, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the correspondence between the numeric element 1201b and the character element 1201c.

In the design 1201, the identification power of the character element 1201c can be improved by enlarging the character element 1201c and displaying it together with the graphic element 1201a.

The pattern 1201 displays all of the graphic elements 1201a, the numeric elements 1201b, and the character elements 1201c as the second step before stopping the fluctuation (P6). That is, the pattern 1201 switches the display target from only the character element 1201c to all of the graphic element 1201a, the numeral element 1201b and the character element 1201c. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can sufficiently exhibit the effect of the design 1201 . In addition, the gaming machine 10 can multilaterally enhance the identification power of the pattern 1201 before the stoppage of fluctuation. Also, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the correspondence between the character element 1201c and the graphic element 1201a. Also, the gaming machine 10 can further emphasize the correspondence between the numeric elements 1201b and the character elements 1201c.

Such a game machine 10 is effective when the graphic elements 1201a, the numerical elements 1201b, and the character elements 1201c are not of the same degree of discrimination. For example, when similar characters (girls A, B, C, D, E) are used as graphic elements in a plurality of designs, the graphic elements cannot be distinguished at a glance. In such a case, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the correspondence between the graphic element, the numeric element, and the character element, and the respective relationships between the graphic element and the numeric element, the graphic element and the character element, and the numeric element and the character element. Facilitates tying. Such ease of linking is an effect that cannot be obtained by simply presenting graphic elements, numeric elements, and character elements at the same time.

In the game machine 10, the pattern 1201 is composed of the graphic element 1201a, the number element 1201b and the character element 1201c, but the pattern 1201 may be constructed by adding a second graphic element. Also, the game machine 10 may configure the pattern 1201 by adding a second graphic element instead of the character element 1201c.

That is, the gaming machine 10 may have two or more graphic elements, and may selectively display two or more graphic elements during the variable display. The two or more graphic elements may be independent graphic elements (for example, stage, character, background, etc.), or may be mutually related graphic elements (for example, character's head, upper body, lower body, etc.). ). For example, two or more graphic elements may together constitute a composite graphic. In other words, two or more graphic elements can be regarded as sub graphic elements (lower graphic elements) for a composite graphic (upper graphic element). It should be noted that not all of the sub-graphic elements are required to each have distinctiveness. The discriminating power as a graphic element may be realized by having at least one sub-graphic element having discriminative power, or may be realized by a combination of two or more sub-graphic elements. .

For example, when a character consisting of a head, upper body, and lower body is a composite graphic (upper graphic element), each of the head, upper body, and lower body is a sub graphic element (lower graphic element). The gaming machine 10 adds numerical elements to such graphic elements (composite graphics) to form patterns, so that, for example, a pattern in which a character (whole body) is attached with numbers is displayed during variable display including when the fluctuation is stopped. can. The gaming machine 10 can display a pattern in which a number is attached to a part of two or more sub graphic elements (for example, the head of a character, etc.) during the variable display.

Also, when a character having arms and armor is a composite graphic (higher-level graphic element), each of the character, arms, and armor is a sub-graphic element (lower-level graphic element). The gaming machine 10 constructs patterns by adding numerical elements to such graphic elements (composite graphics). Can be displayed during variable display. The game machine 10 can display a pattern in which numbers are attached to some of two or more sub graphic elements (for example, arms and armor) during the variable display.

The gaming machine 10 may fix the number and combination of sub graphic elements displayed during the variable display, or may change them in relation to the progress of the game and notification of the degree of expectation.
Next, the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG.

The display screen 1250 is the display contents of the display device 41 during symbol stop in the variable display game. The display screen 1250 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1253, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1254, a reserved display 1255, and a reserved digestion display 1256 in the display contents.

The two sets of decorative designs include a large design group 1251 as a first decorative design and a small design group 1252 as a second decorative design. The large pattern group 1251 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large pattern group 1251 is displayed largely in the approximate center of the display device 41 . The large symbol group 1251 includes a left symbol 1251L, a middle symbol 1251C and a right symbol 1251R. The left symbol 1251L, the middle symbol 1251C and the right symbol 1251R on the display screen 1250 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

Generally, the large symbol group 1251 starts to change in the order of left symbol 1251L, right symbol 1251R, and medium symbol 1251C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of left symbol 1251L, right symbol 1251R, and medium symbol 1251C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 1251 forms a reach state with the left symbol 1251L and the right symbol 1251R, and waits for the stop of the middle symbol 1251C to enable the formation of the hit state.

Decorative patterns A are mainly used for the patterns (left pattern 1251L, middle pattern 1251C, and right pattern 1251R) that constitute the large pattern group 1251 . For example, the left design 1251L displays the design 1201, the middle design 1251C displays the design 1203, and the right design 1251R displays the design 1205.

The small symbol group 1252 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group 1252 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 1251 . The small symbol group 1252 includes left symbols, medium symbols and right symbols. The left, medium and right symbols in the small symbol group 1252 on the display screen 1250 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

In general, the large symbol group 1251 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 1252, has a high degree of freedom in display position, and can be greatly changed in its display mode. On the contrary, the small pattern group 1252 is displayed smaller than the large pattern group 1251, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

Special figure 1 reserved number display 1253 displays the number of reserved memories (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 pending number display 1254 displays the number of pending memories of the special figure 2 game. The pending display 1255 can clearly indicate the number of pending memories of the special figure fluctuation display game by its display mode, and can report the degree of expectation for the game result for each pending memory. The number of pending storage that the pending display 1255 displays corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storage that the special figure 1 pending number display 1253 displays and the number of pending storage that the special figure 2 pending number display 1254 displays. The pending digestion display 1256 can indicate, by its display mode, that the special figure variation display game is in a variation display state, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result.

On the display screen 1250, the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1253 is "0", and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1254 is "0". Therefore, the pending storage count indicated by the pending display 1255 is also "0". In addition, the display screen 1250 shows that the special figure variation display game is in the process of design stop by the pending digestion display 1256 .

Also, in the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252 are each composed of three-digit symbols, but any number of digits may be used as long as one or more symbols are included. In the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252 have the same number of symbol digits, but the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252 have different numbers of symbol digits. good too.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the transparency of the large symbol group 1251 (for example, change the transparency from 0% to 50%) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display. For the small pattern group 1252, the transparency of the pattern can be fixed (for example, the transparency is fixed to 0%). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the visibility of the small symbol group 1252 while ensuring the diversity of the display effects of the large symbol group 1251, thereby facilitating the player's understanding of the game state.

Next, the variation display process in the special figure variation display game will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. FIG. 170 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen in the display device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 171 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen in the display device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 172 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen in the display device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG.

The gaming machine 10 stops displaying the symbols before the start of variation in the variation display game. A display screen 1261 shown in FIG. 170(1) shows a state in which a large pattern group 1251 using the decorative pattern A and a small pattern group 1252 are stopped and displayed. The large pattern group 1251 displays all of the graphic elements, number elements and character elements in the decorative pattern A. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L displays "1 (symbol 1201)", the middle symbol 1251C displays "2 (symbol 1202)", and the right symbol 1251R displays "2 (symbol 1202)". Displaying and stopping. The display screen 1261 displays the left pattern 1251L and the right pattern 1251R in a size larger than the middle pattern 1251C. The small symbol group 1252 is stopped while displaying symbols corresponding to the large symbol group 1251 (for example, one-to-one correspondence). In the small symbol group 1252, the left symbol displays "1", the medium symbol "2", and the right symbol "2". At this time, the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1253 is "2", and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1254 is "1". Therefore, the number of pending memories indicated by the pending display 1255 is "3". In addition, the display screen 1261 shows that the special figure fluctuation display game is in the process of design stop by the pending digestion display 1256 .

Next, the gaming machine 10 starts symbol variation. A display screen 1262 shown in FIG. 170(2) shows a state after a large pattern group 1251 using the decorative pattern A and a small pattern group 1252 are displayed in a variable manner. The large pattern group 1251 hides the graphic elements and character elements in the decorative pattern A and displays the numeric elements. In the large pattern group 1251, the left pattern 1251L displays "1 (design element 1201b)", the middle design 1251C displays "2 (design element 1202b)", and the right design 1251R displays "2 (design element 1202b)". )” is displayed and the variable display is in progress. The display screen 1262 displays the left pattern 1251L and the right pattern 1251R in a size larger than the middle pattern 1251C. The small symbol group 1252 is disengaged from the large symbol group 1251 and is being variably displayed asynchronously with the large symbol group 1251 . At this time, the special figure 1 reserved number display 1253 displays the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game by one, and the reserved display 1255 displays the reserved memory number of the special figure fluctuation display game by one. do. The pending digestion display 1256 indicates that the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state.

Next, the game machine 10 changes by increasing the speed of pattern change. A display screen 1264 shown in FIG. 170(3) shows a state in which a large pattern group 1251 using the decorative pattern A and a small pattern group 1252 are being variably displayed. The large pattern group 1251 hides the graphic elements and character elements in the decorative pattern A, and displays the numeric elements with a predetermined transmittance (for example, transmittance of 70%).

Next, the game machine 10 reduces the speed of the symbol fluctuation and becomes before the fluctuation stop (for example, temporary stop first step). The display screen 1266 shown in FIG. 170(4) shows the state before the fluctuation stop of the large pattern group 1251 using the decorative pattern A and the small pattern group 1252 . The large pattern group 1251 hides the graphic elements and character elements in the decorative pattern A and displays the numeric elements. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 facilitates identification of the stop symbols. In the large pattern group 1251, the left pattern 1251L displays "3 (design element 1203b)", the middle design 1251C displays "5 (design element 1205b)", and the right design 1251R displays "4 (design element 1204b)". )” is displayed and it is temporarily stopped. The small symbol group 1252 is displayed in a variable manner asynchronously with the large symbol group 1251 while the correspondence with the large symbol group 1251 is cancelled.

Next, the game machine 10 becomes before the fluctuation stop (for example, the temporary stop second step). The display screen 1268 shown in FIG. 171(1) shows the state before the fluctuation stop of the large pattern group 1251 using the decorative pattern A and the small pattern group 1252 . The large pattern group 1251 hides the graphic elements and number elements in the decorative pattern A and displays the character elements. That is, the gaming machine 10 switches the display target among the identification elements in the decorative pattern A from the numerical elements to the character elements. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clarify the correspondence between the numeric elements and the character elements. In addition, the gaming machine 10 facilitates identification of stop symbols from various angles. In the large pattern group 1251, the left pattern 1251L displays "3 (design element 1203c)", the middle design 1251C displays "5 (design element 1205c)", and the right design 1251R displays "4 (design element 1204c)." )” is displayed and it is temporarily stopped. The small symbol group 1252 is displayed in a variable manner asynchronously with the large symbol group 1251 while the correspondence with the large symbol group 1251 is cancelled.

Next, the gaming machine 10 becomes before the fluctuation stop (for example, the temporary stop third step). The display screen 1270 shown in FIG. 171(2) shows the state before the fluctuation stop of the large pattern group 1251 using the decorative pattern A and the small pattern group 1252 . A large pattern group 1251 displays graphic elements, numeric elements and character elements in the decorative pattern A. That is, the gaming machine 10 switches the display target of the identification elements in the decorative pattern A from the character elements to all the identification elements. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clarify the correspondence between the character elements and the graphic elements. In addition, the gaming machine 10 facilitates identification of stop symbols from various angles. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L displays "3 (symbol 1203)", the middle symbol 1251C displays "5 (symbol 1205)", and the right symbol 1251R displays "4 (symbol 1204)". is displayed and is temporarily stopped. The small symbol group 1252 is displayed in a variable manner asynchronously with the large symbol group 1251 while the correspondence with the large symbol group 1251 is cancelled.

Next, the gaming machine 10 comes to a fluctuation stop. The display screen 1272 shown in FIG. 171(3) shows that the large pattern group 1251 using the decorative pattern A and the small pattern group 1252 are in a state of stopping fluctuation. The small symbol group 1252 is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the large symbol group 1251 . Moreover, the display screen 1272 shows that the special figure variation display game has stopped by the pending digestion display 1256 .

In this way, the game machine 10 can well recognize the symbols according to the variable display process, and can also satisfactorily identify the symbols according to the variable display process.
Next, FIG. 172(1) shows another example of the display mode of decorative symbols during symbol variation (for example, reach variation). A display screen 1274 shows a state in which a large pattern group 1277 and a small pattern group 1252 are displayed in a variable manner. Display screen 1274 includes effect display area 1275 . The display area of the large pattern group 1277 is smaller than the display area of the large pattern group 1251, and is not sufficient to display the decorative pattern A. Display pattern B. Note that the effect display area 1275 is playing the movie A, and the movie A displays the effect element 1276 . A large pattern group 1277 displays a decorative pattern B corresponding to the effect element 1276 .

Next, FIG. 172(2) shows another example of the display mode of decorative symbols during symbol variation (for example, reach variation). A display screen 1278 shows a state in which the large symbol group 1277 and the small symbol group 1252 are displayed in a variable manner. Display screen 1278 includes effect display area 1275 . The display area of the large pattern group 1277 is smaller than the display area of the large pattern group 1251, and is not sufficient to display the decorative pattern A. Display the symbol C. Note that movie B is being reproduced in effect display area 1275 , and movie B displays effect element 1279 . A large pattern group 1277 displays a decorative pattern C corresponding to the production element 1276 .

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can display the decorative symbol B or the decorative symbol C instead of the decorative symbol A when the display area of the large symbol group 1277 is not large enough. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can selectively display the decorative symbol B or the decorative symbol C corresponding to the display contents of the effect display area 1275 .

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the distinguishability of the symbols in the large symbol group 1277 while improving the rendering effect of the rendering display area 1275 . In addition, the game machine 10 can further improve the performance effect by performing a cooperative performance with the performance display area 1275 and the large symbol group 1277 .

Next, the switching timing of the display mode of the decorative pattern will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the switching timing of the decorative symbol display mode in the special game variation of the fifth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 performs a special game variation in which a period Ta from timing t11 to timing t17 is a symbol variation time and a period Tb from timing t17 to timing t18 is a symbol stop time.

The decorative pattern A is a display mode (A1) in which all identification elements are displayed from before the start of pattern variation to timing t12 (including at least the period Ta1 from timing t11 to timing t12). Further, the decorative pattern A has a display mode (A2) in which the figure element and the character element are hidden and the number element is displayed during a period Ta2 from timing t12 to timing t13.

A period Ta3 from timing t13 to timing t14 is a movie performance period, and when movie A is displayed, decorative pattern A is switched to decorative pattern B, and when movie B is displayed, decorative pattern A is changed to decorative pattern C. can be switched. In addition, when the period Ta3 from the timing t13 to the timing t14 is not set as the movie production period, the decorative pattern A may be continuously displayed during the period.

Then, when the movie production period ends at timing t14, the decorative pattern B or the decorative pattern C is switched to the decorative pattern A. The decorative pattern A is a display mode (A2) in which the figure element and the character element are hidden and the number element is displayed during a period Ta4 from timing t14 to timing t15. The decorative pattern A is a display mode (A3) in which the graphic element and the numeric element are hidden and the character element is displayed during the period Ta5 from the timing t15 to the timing t16. The decorative pattern A is a display mode (A1) in which all identification elements are displayed in a period Ta6 from timing t16 to timing t17, and continues the display mode (A1) including a period Tb from timing t17 to timing t18. do.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can selectively display two or more identification elements included in the decorative symbols according to the variable display state. The selective display modes and the switching order of the two or more identification elements included in the decorative pattern are not limited to those illustrated, and other combinations and other switching orders may be used.

Next, Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of Modified Example 1 of the fifth embodiment comprises decorative symbols with two or more identifying elements and accessory elements. The decorative pattern of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative design in modification 1 of the fifth embodiment.

A symbol 1291 representing the number "1" representing the decorative symbol A will be used for explanation. Note that the other symbols (for example, symbols displaying the number "2" and the number "3") are the same as the symbol 1291, so description thereof will be omitted.

A pattern 1291 is a pattern that displays the number "1". The pattern 1291 is composed of a graphic element 1291a that is identifiable as a pattern by means of a figure (for example, a character like a boy), a numeral element 1291b that is identifiable as a pattern by the number "1", and an attachment that does not necessarily have identifiability. element 1291c. That is, the graphic element 1291a and the numeric element 1291b are the identification elements of the design 1291, respectively. Graphic elements 1291a, numeric elements 1291b, and attached elements 1291c are constituent elements of the pattern 1291, respectively.

The attached element 1291c may have a display mode different from that of the attached element in other designs, or may have an overlapping display mode. Attachment element 1291c has a predetermined display mode (for example, a star mark) by default, and changes the display mode to one of the special symbols at a predetermined time.

The special symbols include, for example, "tiger", "pig", and "lion" as characters for informing transition to a predetermined game state in the variable display game. At this time, "tiger" informs the transition to tiger mode (for example, latent probability change), "pig" informs the transition to pig mode (for example, power supply support), and "lion" is the lion. (Lion) Notify the transition to mode (for example, probability variation). Note that the special symbols may include, for example, "tiger", "pig", and "lion" as characters for notifying a predetermined effect in the variable display game. At this time, "tiger" foretells a production in which a tiger-like character appears, "pig" foretells a production in which a pig-like character appears, and "lion" foretells a lion. Foreshadows a production in which characters such as

In addition, the special symbols are characters for notifying the reliability of the results (for example, big wins) derived by the variable display game, such as "?", "!", "!!" including "accurate". At this time, "?" informs the reliability of the big win "1%", "!" informs the reliability of the big win "10%", and "!!" informs the reliability of the big win "20%". , ``chance'' indicates a reliability of ``30%'' for a big win, ``hot heat'' indicates a reliability of ``90%'' for a big win, and ``precision'' indicates a reliability for a big win of ``100%''. Also, the special symbols include, for example, "development" and "continue" as characters for notifying progress in the variable display game. At this time, "development" informs the development to super reach, and "continuation" informs the continuation of the pseudo-ren. In addition, the special symbols include, for example, "hit", "hit 5R", "hit 16R", "short time", and "probability change" as characters that inform the value of the result (hit) derived by the variable display game. At this time, “hit” announces the win itself without specifying the size of the value, “hit 5R” announces that it is a 5R round win, and “hit 16R” announces that it is a 16R round win. "Short working hours" informs that it is a hit with a short time (general electric support), and "Probability change" informs that it is a hit with probability fluctuation.

Also, the special symbols include, for example, "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" as characters for informing mode changes in the display effect. At this time, "mode A" notifies the transition to mode A, "mode B" notifies the transition to mode B, and "mode C" notifies the transition to mode C. In addition, the special symbol includes, for example, "last 10 times" as a character indicating the number of continuations of a predetermined game state such as general electric support or probability variation. At this time, "last 10 times" informs that the number of continuations of the probability variation is 10 times remaining. In addition, the special symbols include, for example, "Press!" as characters for notifying game guidance. At this time, "Push!" notifies the reception timing of the pressing operation of the push button 25. FIG.

The design 1291 can also selectively display identification elements and attached elements, similarly to the decorative design A described in the fifth embodiment. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both improved recognizability of symbols and improved presentation effect.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of Modified Example 2 of the fifth embodiment makes it possible to easily recognize the changing state of symbols by the temporary stop display mode according to the changing display process.

First, the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a display device according to Modification 2 of Embodiment 5. FIG.
A display screen 1330 shown in FIG. 175(1) is the display contents of the display device 41 during symbol stop in the variable display game. The display screen 1330 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1303, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1304, a reserved display 1305, and a reserved digestion display 1306 in the display contents.

The two sets of decorative patterns include a large pattern group 1331 as a first decorative pattern and a small pattern group 1302 as a second decorative pattern. The large pattern group 1331 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large pattern group 1331 is displayed largely in the substantially central portion of the display device 41 . The large symbol group 1331 includes an upper left symbol 1331A, a lower left symbol 1331B, an upper middle symbol 1331C, a lower middle symbol 1331D, an upper right symbol 1331E, and a lower right symbol 1331F. The upper left pattern 1331A, the lower left pattern 1331B, the upper middle pattern 1331C, the lower middle pattern 1331D, the upper right pattern 1331E, and the lower right pattern 1331F of the display screen 1330 are all in the pattern stop state of the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game. indicates that The large pattern group 1331 includes a first effective line consisting of an upper left pattern 1331A, an upper middle pattern 1331C and an upper right pattern 1331E, and a second effective line consisting of a lower left pattern 1331B, a lower middle pattern 1331D and a lower right pattern 1331F. , is the winning line.

The upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B, the upper middle pattern 1331C and the lower middle pattern 1331D, and the upper right pattern 1331E and the lower right pattern 1331F are on the same pattern arrangement, and are interlocked and scrolled in the vertical direction.

Further, the upper left pattern 1331A, the lower left pattern 1331B, the upper middle pattern 1331C, the lower middle pattern 1331D, the upper right pattern 1331E, and the lower right pattern 1331F are each configured to include an identification element 1332 and an auxiliary element 1333. be. The identification element 1332 includes information that can uniquely identify the design, and includes numbers, for example. The auxiliary element 1333 is an auxiliary element that guides the variation state of the upper left pattern 1331A, the lower left pattern 1331B, the upper middle pattern 1331C, the lower middle pattern 1331D, the upper right pattern 1331E, and the lower right pattern 1331F. For example, the upper left design 1331A includes the number "1" as the identification element 1332, and is identified as the design corresponding to the number "1". In addition, the upper left symbol 1331A is guided to the symbol stop state by the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 .

The auxiliary element 1333 is a display element that assists guidance of the state of the variation table, and is a decoration element that decorates the pattern from one point of view. Auxiliary element 1333 can be composed of, for example, a character, a figure, or the like.

The small symbol group 1302 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group 1302 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 1331 . The small symbol group 1302 includes left symbols, medium symbols and right symbols. The left symbol, medium symbol, and right symbol in the small symbol group 1302 on the display screen 1330 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

In general, the large pattern group 1331 is displayed larger than the small pattern group 1302, has a high degree of freedom in display position, and can be greatly changed in its display mode. On the contrary, the small pattern group 1302 is displayed smaller than the large pattern group 1331, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 reserved number display 1303 displays the number of reserved memories (the number of start memories) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 reserved number display 1304 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. The pending display 1305 can clearly indicate the number of pending memories of the special figure fluctuation display game and inform the degree of expectation for the game result for each pending memory by its display mode. The number of pending storage that the pending display 1305 displays corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storage that the special figure 1 pending number display 1303 and the number of pending storage that the special figure 2 pending number display 1304 displays. The pending digestion display 1306 can indicate, by its display mode, that the special figure fluctuation display game is in a fluctuation display state, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result.

On the display screen 1330, the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1303 is "0", and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1304 is "0". Therefore, the pending storage count indicated by the pending display 1305 is also "0". Moreover, the display screen 1330 shows that the special figure variation display game is in the process of design stop by the pending digestion display 1306 .

In the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 1331 is composed of six symbols and the small symbol group 1302 is composed of three digit symbols, but any number of symbols may be included as long as one or more symbols are included. In the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 have the same number of symbol digits, but the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 have different numbers of symbol digits. good too. For example, the small symbol group 1302 displays the symbols "1, 2, 2" corresponding to the first active line of the large symbol group 1331, and corresponds to the first and second active lines of the large symbol group 1331. The symbols "1, 2, 2, 2, 1, 1" may be displayed.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the transparency of the large symbol group 1331 (for example, change the transparency from 0% to 50%) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display. For the small pattern group 1302, the transparency of the pattern can be fixed (for example, the transparency is fixed to 0%). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the visibility of the small symbol group 1302 while ensuring the diversity of the display effects of the large symbol group 1331, thereby facilitating the player's understanding of the game state.

In addition, the game machine 10 changes the hue of the large symbol group 1331 (for example, from red to blue) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display. For 1302, the hue of the design can be fixed (for example, fixed to red). In addition, the game machine 10 may change the saturation of the symbols of the large symbol group 1331 (for example, change the saturation from 100% to 0%) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display. Also, for the small pattern group 1302, the saturation of the symbols can be fixed (for example, the saturation is fixed at 100%). Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the brightness of the large symbol group 1331 during variable display and stop display, or during variable display (for example, change the brightness from 100% to 10%). The brightness of the small pattern group 1302 can be fixed (for example, the brightness is fixed at 100%). In addition, the gaming machine 10 can change the size of the large symbol group 1331 (for example, change from standard size to enlarged (reduced) size) between variable display and stop display, or during variable display. Even if there is, the size of the symbol can be fixed for the small symbol group 1302 . In addition, even if the game machine 10 changes the display position of the large symbol group 1331 (for example, from the center of the screen to the upper left of the screen) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display, The display position of the small pattern group 1302 can be fixed (for example, fixed at the bottom right of the screen). In addition, the game machine 10 can change the design of the large symbol group 1331 (for example, change from a rectangle to a circle, or change from numbers to characters) between variable display and stop display, or during variable display. Even if there is, it is possible to fix the design of the small pattern group 1302 (for example, fix it to a number). In addition, even if the game machine 10 changes the variable display mode of the large symbol group 1331 during variable display (for example, changes from vertical scrolling to horizontal scrolling), the variable display mode of the small symbol group 1302 is changed. can be fixed (eg fixed to shaft rotation variation).

These also allow the gaming machine 10 to ensure the visibility of the small symbol group 1302 while ensuring the diversity of the display effects of the large symbol group 1331, thereby facilitating the player's grasp of the game state.

In addition, the game machine 10 can make the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 differ in variation mode during variation display. For example, when the large symbol group 1331 is vertically scrolled, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 . In addition, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player even when the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 are updated asynchronously.

A display screen 1334 shown in FIG. 175(2) is the display contents of the display device 41 during symbol variation in the variation display game. On the display screen 1334, the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1303 is "1", and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1304 is "0". Therefore, the number of pending memories indicated by the pending display 1305 is also "1". In addition, the display screen 1334 shows that the special figure variation display game is in the process of pattern variation by the pending digestion display 1306 . The upper left pattern 1331A, the lower left pattern 1331B, the upper middle pattern 1331C, the lower middle pattern 1331D, the upper right pattern 1331E, and the lower right pattern 1331F of the display screen 1334 are all in the pattern fluctuation state of the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game. indicates that In addition, the left, medium and right symbols in the small symbol group 1302 on the display screen 1334 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

At this time, the upper left design 1331A, the lower left design 1331B, the upper middle design 1331C, the lower middle design 1331D, the upper right design 1331E, and the lower right design 1331F are all of which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is hidden. Indicates that the variable display is in progress.

Here, the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a large pattern in the display device of modification 2 of the fifth embodiment.

A symbol 1335 shown in FIG. 176(1) is one display mode of the symbols (large symbols) included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a state in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is hidden. The display mode (unspecified) of the auxiliary element 1333 indicates a specific variable display state. For example, the symbol 1335 is a display mode from the start of variation to the stop of the symbol (temporary stop).

A pattern 1336 shown in FIG. 176(2) is one display mode of the patterns included in the large pattern group 1331, and shows a state in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is specified in the first color (for example, silver). The display mode (explicitly) of the auxiliary element 1333 indicates a specific variable display state, for example, indicates a state during symbol stop (temporary stop).

A pattern 1336 shown in FIG. 176(3) is one display mode of the patterns included in the large pattern group 1331, and shows a state in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is specified in the second color (for example, gold). The display mode (explicitly) of the auxiliary element 1333 indicates a specific variable display state, for example, indicates a state during symbol stop (temporary stop).

In addition, the color of the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 may be selected according to the current gaming state, such as establishment of a reach on the jackpot effective line or establishment of a jackpot on the jackpot effective line. Further, the color in the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 may be selected according to the progress of the game, such as the degree of expectation, the advance notice of reach, the advance notice of big hit, and the like.

Next, the temporary stop display mode of the symbols (large symbols) included in the large symbol group 1331 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display mode list by state of the large pattern in the display device of Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment.

A symbol 1338 shown in FIG. 177(1) is one display mode of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a temporary stop display mode in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is hidden. The pattern 1338 swings in the scroll direction (vertical direction) with the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 hidden.

A symbol 1339 shown in FIG. 177(2) is one display mode of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a temporary stop display mode in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is specified. The pattern 1339 dynamically changes the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 (for example, alternating display of patterns 1339a and 1339b) (non-fixed display). Such a temporary stop display mode is excellent in visibility of the identification element 1332 because the identification element 1332 is statically displayed. On the other hand, in the temporary stop display mode, since the auxiliary element 1333 is dynamically displayed, the pattern 1339 ensures the visibility of the identification element 1332 and also provides the guidance effect and the presentation effect of the temporary stop display state. can be compatible.

A symbol 1340 shown in FIG. 177(3) is one display mode of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a temporary stop display mode in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is specified. While the design 1340 statically displays (fixes) the auxiliary element 1333 with respect to the identification element 1332, the design 1340 as a whole swings so as to rotate at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis (for example, design 1340a and pattern 1340b are alternately displayed). Such a temporary stop display mode can guide and produce the temporary stop display state in a form different from the temporary stop display mode by the pattern 1339 .

Next, the variation display process in the special figure variation display game will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 2 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 2 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of modification 2 of the fifth embodiment. 181 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of a screen displayed by a display device according to modification 2 of the fifth embodiment; FIG.

The gaming machine 10 stops displaying the symbols before the start of variation in the variation display game. A display screen 1341 shown in FIG. 178(1) shows a state in which a large symbol group 1331 and a small symbol group 1302 are stopped and displayed. In the large symbol group 1331, the upper left symbol 1331A displays "1", the middle upper symbol 1331C displays "2", the upper right symbol 1331E displays "2", and the lower left symbol 1331B displays "2". is displayed, the middle lower symbol 1331D displays "1", and the lower right symbol 1331F displays "1", indicating that the machine is stopped. The small symbol group 1302 is stopped while displaying the symbols corresponding to the large symbol group 1331 . In the small symbol group 1302, the left symbol displays "1", the medium symbol "2", and the right symbol "2". At this time, the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1303 is "2", and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1304 is "1" Therefore, the number of pending memories indicated by the pending display 1305 is "3". In addition, the display screen 1341 shows that the special figure variation display game is in the process of design stop by the pending digestion display 1306 .

Next, the gaming machine 10 starts symbol variation. A display screen 1342 shown in FIG. 178(2) shows a state after the large pattern group 1331 and the small pattern group 1302 start to be displayed in a variable manner. In the large symbol group 1331, an upper left symbol 1331A, a lower left symbol 1331B, an upper middle symbol 1331C, a lower middle symbol 1331D, an upper right symbol 1331E, and a lower right symbol 1331F are being variably displayed. The small symbol group 1302 has been released from the correspondence with the large symbol group 1331 and is being variably displayed asynchronously with the large symbol group 1331 . At this time, the special figure 1 reserved number display 1303 displays the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game by one, and the reserved display 1305 displays the reserved memory number of the special figure fluctuation display game by one. do. The pending digestion display 1306 indicates that the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state.

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops and displays the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B. In the display screen 1344 shown in FIG. 178(3), the upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B of the large pattern group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the upper middle pattern 1331C, the lower middle pattern 1331D, and the upper right pattern are temporarily displayed. A symbol 1331E and a lower right symbol 1331F are displayed in a variable manner. The upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and temporarily stop while swinging in the vertical direction. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the temporary stop display performed by the upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B is a temporary temporary stop display mode, and is intended to smoothly connect to the temporary stop display mode performed on the display screen 1346 shown in FIG. 178(4). It is a connection display of . In the temporary stop display performed by the upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B, the upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B are synchronously swung vertically (see pattern 1338 in FIG. 177). Since the game machine 10 is in the temporary stop display mode, it is limited to a short period (for example, one cycle), and the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B are synchronously swung vertically.

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops and displays the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B in a non-temporary manner. In the display screen 1346 shown in FIG. 178(4), the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner, and the upper middle symbol 1331C and the lower middle symbol 1331D are displayed. An upper right symbol 1331E and a lower right symbol 1331F are displayed in a variable manner. The upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and temporarily stop while the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is dynamically changed. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the temporary stop display performed by the upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B is a non-temporary temporary stop display mode. The temporary stop display performed by the upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B dynamically changes the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 in synchronization with the upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B (see pattern 1339 in FIG. 177). In addition, since the gaming machine 10 is in the non-temporary temporary stop display mode, the dynamic change of the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 performed by the upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B is repeated.

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops and displays the upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F in a non-temporary manner. In the display screen 1348 shown in FIG. 179(1), the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner, A middle upper pattern 1331C and a middle lower pattern 1331D are displayed in a variable manner. The upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B display "1" and "2" respectively, and the upper right pattern 1331E and the lower right pattern 1331F display "1" and "9" respectively to display the auxiliary element 1333. Temporarily stop while dynamically changing. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the display screen 1348 forms the ready-to-win state of the symbol "1" on the first effective line.

Next, the gaming machine 10 notifies the ready-to-win mode formed by the first pay line. A display screen 1350 shown in FIG. 179(2) uses a notification display 1351 to notify the reach state formed by the first effective line. The notification display 1351 guides the formation of the reach state with the character message "reach!" In this way, the game machine 10 temporarily stops while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 as one of the variable display states (reach mode formation process) until the reach mode is notified. . That is, the temporary stop display mode while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 guides the reach mode formation process.

In addition, the upper left pattern 1331A and the upper right pattern 1331E, which form the ready-to-win mode on the first pay line, have the auxiliary element 1333 displayed in a second color (for example, gold) to indicate to the player the formation of the ready-to-win mode (reach notification). ). In addition, the upper left pattern 1331A and the upper right pattern 1331E expressly notify the player of the formation of the ready-to-win mode by setting the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 to the second color before the ready-to-win mode is formed on the first effective line. advance notice). It should be noted that the symbols that are not subject to advance notice are shown in a state in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is specified in the first color (for example, silver).

Next, the gaming machine 10 displays the ready-to-win mode (the process of forming the winning mode). In the display screen 1352 shown in FIG. 179(3), the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner, A middle upper pattern 1331C and a middle lower pattern 1331D are displayed in a variable manner. The upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B display "1" and "2" respectively, and the upper right pattern 1331E and the lower right pattern 1331F display "1" and "9" respectively.

The upper left pattern 1331A and the upper right pattern 1331E forming the reach state on the first effective line temporarily stop while swinging so as to rotate at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis. On the other hand, the lower left symbol 1331B and the lower right symbol 1331F, which do not form the ready-to-win mode on the second pay line, are displayed translucently after the symbols are stopped. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped.

In this way, the game machine 10 rotates the pattern at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis as one of the variable display states (hitting mode formation process) after the notification of the ready-to-win mode. Temporarily stop while In other words, the temporary stop display mode in which the symbols are rotated at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis guides the winning mode forming process.

In the display screen 1354 shown in FIG. 179(4), the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner, The upper middle pattern 1331C and the lower middle pattern 1331D are displayed while being enlarged. Display screen 1354 is one of the display states in which the player's attention is expected to be directed to middle upper symbol 1331C and middle lower symbol 1331D. Further, the display screen 1354 is one of the display modes for guiding the process of forming the winning mode, like the display screen 1352 .

In the display screen 1356 shown in FIG. 180(1), the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner, The middle-upper pattern 1331C is displayed in a variable manner while being enlarged. The display screen 1356 is one of the display states in which the player's attention is expected to be directed to the middle upper symbol 1331C. Also, the display screen 1356 is one of the display modes for guiding the process of forming the winning mode, like the display screen 1352 .

In the display screen 1358 shown in FIG. 180(2), the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner, The middle upper symbol 1331C is temporarily stopped. The display screen 1358 is one of the display states in which the player's attention is expected to be directed to the middle upper symbol 1331C. Also, the display screen 1358 is one of the display modes for guiding the process of forming a winning mode, like the display screen 1352 . In addition, the middle upper symbol 1331C displays "1" while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 and temporarily stops.

A display screen 1360 shown in FIG. 180(3) and a display screen 1362 shown in FIG. 180(4) temporarily stop display the winning mode (the process of forming the winning mode). The display screens 1360 and 1362 temporarily stop and display the symbols on the first effective line among the large symbol group 1331 while swinging at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis, and display the symbols on the second effective line. Stop displaying the pattern.

A display screen 1364 shown in FIG. 181(1) stops and displays symbols in a win mode to derive a variable display result in the variable display game. A display screen 1364 shows a state in which a large pattern group 1331 and a small pattern group 1302 are stopped and displayed. In the large symbol group 1331, the upper left symbol 1331A displays "1", the middle upper symbol 1331C displays "1", the upper right symbol 1331E displays "1", and the lower left symbol 1331B displays "2". is displayed, the middle lower symbol 1331D displays "9", and the lower right symbol 1331F displays "9", indicating that the game is stopped. The small symbol group 1302 is stopped while displaying the symbols corresponding to the large symbol group 1331 . In the small symbol group 1302, the left symbol displays "1", the medium symbol "1", and the right symbol "1". The display screen 1364 shows that the special figure variation display game has stopped due to the pending digestion display 1306 .

So far, the process of forming the ready-to-win state and the process of changing the display to the winning state through the process of forming the winning state have been explained. Next, the process of changing the display to reach the losing state without going through the process of forming the ready-to-win state will be explained.

A display screen 1366 shown in FIG. 181 ( 2 ) is a display screen after the display screen 1364 . On the display screen 1366, the upper left pattern 1331A, the lower left pattern 1331B, the upper right pattern 1331E, and the lower right pattern 1331F of the large pattern group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner, and the upper middle pattern 1331C and the lower middle pattern are displayed. Symbol 1331D is being displayed in a variable manner. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and temporarily stop while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. The upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F respectively indicate " 7” and “6” are displayed to temporarily stop while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 . That is, the display screen 1366 does not form a reach mode on either the first pay line or the second pay line.

In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the temporary stop display performed by the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F is a non-temporary temporary stop display mode.

A display screen 1368 shown in FIG. 181(3) is a display screen after the display screen 1366 . The display screen 1368 is a non-temporary temporary stop display mode in which all the symbols of the symbol group 1331 are displayed. The upper left pattern 1331A and the lower left pattern 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and temporarily stop while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. The middle upper pattern 1331C and the middle lower pattern 1331D respectively display "6" and "5" are displayed to temporarily stop while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333, and the upper right pattern 1331E and the lower right pattern 1331F display "7" and "6", respectively. Temporarily stop while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 . That is, the display screen 1368 is in a losing mode that does not form a reach mode on either the first pay line or the second pay line. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the temporary stop display performed with all symbols of the symbol group 1331 is a non-temporary temporary stop display mode. That is, the display screen 1368 does not have an opportunity to perform a temporary stop display for guiding the winning mode forming process by reaching the losing mode without going through the reach mode forming process.

A display screen 1370 shown in FIG. 181(4) stops and displays the symbols in a detached manner to derive the variable display result in the variable display game. A display screen 1370 shows a state in which a large symbol group 1331 and a small symbol group 1302 are stopped and displayed. In the large symbol group 1331, the upper left symbol 1331A displays "1", the middle upper symbol 1331C displays "6", the upper right symbol 1331E displays "7", and the lower left symbol 1331B displays "2". is displayed, the middle lower symbol 1331D displays "5", the lower right symbol 1331F displays "6", and is stopped. The small symbol group 1302 is stopped while displaying the symbols corresponding to the large symbol group 1331 . In the small symbol group 1302, the left symbol displays "1", the medium symbol "6", and the right symbol "7". The display screen 1370 shows that the special figure variation display game has stopped due to the pending digestion display 1306 .

Although the game machine 10 changes the temporary stop display mode according to the ready-to-win mode formation process and the winning mode formation process, the temporary stop display mode is changed according to other variable display states (game states). may

In addition, although the game machine 10 changes the temporary stop display mode according to the ready-to-win mode formation process and the winning mode formation process, the temporary stop display mode may be changed according to the number of symbols to be temporarily stopped. .

In addition, although the game machine 10 changes the temporary stop display mode according to the ready-to-win mode formation process and the winning mode formation process, the temporary stop display mode may be changed according to the position and the number of effective lines. .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 changes the temporary stop display mode according to the variable display state (game state), thereby guiding the player to the variable display state from the temporary stop display mode displayed on the display device 41. be able to.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment changes the temporary stop display mode by changing the display mode of the symbols.

A temporary stop display mode of the gaming machine 10 of Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display mode of a large symbol in the display device of Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment.

A symbol 1380 shown in FIG. 182(1) is a symbol that constitutes a large symbol group 1331 . The design 1380 includes a background element 1381 , a secondary identification element 1382 and a main identification element 1383 . A pattern 1380 is formed by superimposing a secondary identification element 1382 and a main identification element 1383 against a background element 1381, with the main identification element 1383 in the foreground. The main identification element 1383 is an identification display that allows the design to be specified, such as characters and figures. The sub-identification element 1382 is an identification display that assists the main identification element 1383 to enable identification of the design, and is, for example, a character. A pattern 1380 includes a background element 1381, a secondary identification element 1382, and a main identification element 1383, and swings in the scroll direction (vertical direction) to realize one of the temporary stop display modes.

A symbol 1384 shown in FIG. 182(2) is a symbol that constitutes the large symbol group 1331 . A design 1384 includes a secondary identification element 1382 and a main identification element 1383 . A pattern 1384 is formed by overlapping the secondary identification element 1382 and the main identification element 1383, with the main identification element 1383 in the foreground. A pattern 1384 includes a secondary identification element 1382 and a main identification element 1383 and swings in the scroll direction (vertical direction) to realize one of the temporary stop display modes.

A symbol 1385 shown in FIG. 182(3) is a symbol that constitutes the large symbol group 1331 . Graphic 1385 includes background element 1381 and main identification element 1383 . The pattern 1385 is superimposed on the main identification element 1383 with the background element 1381 as the background, and the main identification element 1383 is in the foreground. A pattern 1385 includes a background element 1381 and a main identification element 1383 and swings in the scroll direction (vertical direction), thereby realizing one of the temporary stop display modes.

A symbol 1386 shown in FIG. 182(4) is a symbol that constitutes the large symbol group 1331 . Graphic 1386 includes main identifying element 1383 . Graphic 1386 brings main identifying element 1383 to the foreground. The pattern 1386 includes the main identification element 1383 and swings in the scroll direction (vertical direction), thereby realizing one of the temporary stop display modes.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can change the temporary stop display mode by changing the display mode of the symbols. The temporary stop display mode thus changed allows the gaming machine 10 to guide the player to the variable display state.

Note that the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game including the symbol group (large symbol group 1331) composed of a plurality of symbols. Further, when a predetermined number of symbols (upper left symbol 1331A, upper right symbol 1331E) out of the symbol group form a ready-to-reach mode and perform a temporary stop display, the control means changes the predetermined number of symbols to the first temporary stop display mode ( display screens 1352, 1354), and when a predetermined number of patterns (upper left pattern 1331A, upper right pattern 1331E) perform a temporary stop display without forming a ready-to-reach mode, a predetermined number of patterns are different from the first temporary stop display mode. It is displayed on the display means as the second temporary stop display mode (display screens 1366 and 1368).

Note that the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game that variably displays the symbols. The control means divides the design into a first constituent element (eg, graphic element 1201a) having a first distinguishing power and a second constituent element (eg, numeric element 1201b or character element 1201c) having a second distinguishing power. and causes the display means to selectively display the first component and the second component according to the variable display process.

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game including the symbol group (large symbol group 1331) composed of a plurality of symbols. Further, when a predetermined number of symbols (upper left symbol 1331A, upper right symbol 1331E) out of the symbol group form a ready-to-reach mode and perform a temporary stop display, the control means changes the predetermined number of symbols to the first temporary stop display mode ( display screens 1352, 1354), and when a predetermined number of patterns (upper left pattern 1331A, upper right pattern 1331E) perform a temporary stop display without forming a ready-to-reach mode, a predetermined number of patterns are different from the first temporary stop display mode. It is displayed on the display means as the second temporary stop display mode (display screens 1366 and 1368).

(3) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game including the symbol group (large symbol group 1331) composed of a plurality of symbols. Furthermore, the control means adds a decorative element (auxiliary element 1333) for decorating the pattern to the pattern when the pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and puts the pattern in the stopped state and the decorative element in the non-stopped state (the pattern 1339). to display on the display means (display screens 1348 and 1350).

(4) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game that variably displays the symbols. The control means divides the design into a first component having a first discriminating power (eg, graphic element 1201a), a second component having a second discriminating power (eg, numeral element 1201b), and a third discriminating power. and a third constituent element (for example, character element 1201c) having force, and selectively displaying the first constituent element, the second constituent element and the third constituent element on the display means according to the variable display process. Let

(5) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game that variably displays the symbols. The control means configures the pattern to include a first constituent element (for example, graphic element 1201a) having a first distinguishing power and a second constituent element (for example, numeral element 1201b) having a second distinguishing power. Further, the first component includes a third component (for example, a head when the first component is a character) and a fourth component (for example, an upper body when the first component is a character). Then, according to the variable display process, the display means selectively displays the first component and only the third component, or selectively displays the third component and the fourth component.

(6) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game that variably displays the symbols. The control means configures the pattern to include a first constituent element (for example, graphic element 1201a) having a first distinguishing power and a second constituent element (for example, numeral element 1201b) having a second distinguishing power. Further, the first component includes a third component (for example, a head when the first component is a character) and a fourth component (for example, an upper body when the first component is a character). Then, the second component, the third component and the fourth component are selectively displayed on the display means according to the variable display process.

Note that the processing functions described above can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. A program describing the processing content can be recorded in a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices, optical disks, magneto-optical recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical disks include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk)-ROM/RW (ReWritable), and the like. Magneto-optical recording media include MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

When distributing a program, for example, portable recording media such as DVDs and CD-ROMs on which the program is recorded are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

A computer that executes a program stores, for example, a program recorded on a portable recording medium or a program transferred from a server computer in its own storage device. The computer then reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Also, the computer can execute processing according to the received program every time the program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network.

At least part of the above processing functions can also be implemented by electronic circuits such as DSPs (Digital Signal Processors), ASICs (Application Specific Integrated Circuits), and PLDs (Programmable Logic Devices).

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine. It can be applied to all game machines using game balls and slot machines which are game machines using medals.

Also, the disclosed embodiments should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. Also, the configurations of the above-described embodiment and modifications may be combined and applied. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

10 Game Machine 41 Display Device 100 Game Control Device 300 Effect Control Device

Claims (1)

display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays symbols;
a control means for displaying the variable display game on the display means,
including a first pattern and a second pattern as the pattern,
The control means is
As the temporary stop display of the first symbol, the temporary stop display is performed at the first trigger in the variable display game, the temporary stop display is performed at the second trigger after the first trigger, and the second trigger is performed. A temporary stop display is performed at a later third opportunity,
When the first symbol performs the temporary stop display, the second symbol does not perform the temporary stop display,
game machine.

Images